JP6754160B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

A gaming machine (for example, a so-called pachinko machine) that plays a game by driving a game ball toward the game area and rolling down the driven game ball in the game area is widely known. The game board of such a game machine has a prize detection sensor that detects the winning of a game ball in a winning opening (starting opening, a large winning opening, a normal winning opening, etc.), and detects an illegal game act on the game board. A large number of detection sensors such as sensors for the purpose (for example, vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection sensor) are arranged (for example, Patent Document 1).

In a game machine, there is a situation in which detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, they are arranged in the vicinity of a start port, a winning port, a large winning port, an out port, and the like). Therefore, it is common practice to use a connector member for electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on a panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor. ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-165673

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down when a vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, such as when playing right-handed, contact resistance is generated by this. There is a risk. When a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to such a situation, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor rises, and there is a risk that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance.

The game machine according to claim 1 is provided with an abutting member capable of colliding with a game ball in the right region of the game area and causing the colliding game ball to flow downward in the rolling direction, and at a predetermined position. A game board provided with magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and the magnetic detection means and the first connector member are connected so that the detection signal of the magnetic detection means is input. The main control board is connected to the relay board by a second connector member , and the magnetic detection means and the main control are provided via the first connector member and the second connector member. In a game machine to which a substrate is electrically connected, the main control substrate has a first voltage when the magnetic detection means is in the first state, while the magnetic detection means is in the second state. Is an on / off of the output of the detection signal corresponding to the first voltage or the second voltage from the voltage output unit and the voltage output unit which is a second voltage which is lower than the first voltage. a detection circuit unit for switching, the magnetic detection means and the second lower at constant than high the first voltage than the voltage due to contact resistance that occurs in the second connector member when the non-detection state avoidance unit comprising a resistive element without using a Zener diode to avoid acts to not switch the output of the detection signal of the detecting circuit portion by the application of voltage, but provided in a state of being electrically connected it is characterized in that there.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. is there. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of the third production operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 3rd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and (b) is the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in (a). It is an explanatory diagram seen from. (A) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state toward | It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the state which the 1st decorative surface part and the 2nd decorative surface part are rotated in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the air flow by the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which mainly shows the structural example of the 1st decorative surface part in the 1st modification of the 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the 1st modification of the 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which mainly shows the structural example of the 2nd decorative surface part in the 2nd modification of the 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the 2nd modification of the 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 10 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 101 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 101 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 101 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 106. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel plate of a game panel opaque. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 133 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 133 as viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in FIG. 133. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU in FIG. 133. It is a front view which cut the front unit in the game board at the substantially center in the front-rear direction in the game area. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of a game panel transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main structure and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction, and showed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at later. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along the VV line in (a) and enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable production knit on the back side mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable production unit disassembled for each main constituent unit and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the first decorative body unit on the back side viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up second decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up second decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the second decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the second decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the third decorative body unit on the back side viewed from the front by disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view of the third decorative body unit on the back side viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up rotation base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear composition in the back-up rotation base unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the non-action position from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the descending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is the raising position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is the descending position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in the back-up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the non-action position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the non-action position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which regulates the rotation by the action lever in the back-up movable production unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position. When the movable side unit is in the descending position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back-up movable production unit, the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up first are in the working position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which acts on a three ornamental body unit. (A) is a front view of the back lower movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a rear view of the back lower movable effect unit, and (c) is a back lower movable decorative unit in the back lower movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. After moving the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body of the back right movable effect unit to the appearance position closer to the center, the first decorative surface of each is facing forward. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 190 so that their second decorative surfaces are directed forward. .. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 190 so that each third decorative surface is directed forward. .. In the back unit, the back upper movable effect unit, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the back upper second decorative unit. After the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are in the closed positions, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper second decorative body are placed in the closed positions, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the body unit and the back upper third decorative body unit are moved to the descending position with the back upper rotation base unit in a horizontal position so that it is arranged horizontally. From the state shown in FIG. 193, the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit are obliquely rotated. It is a front view of the game board shown in a side-by-side state. From the state of FIG. 194, the back-up rotation base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction to be in the vertical position, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative body unit in a state that it is arranged vertically. From the state of FIG. 181, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back in the open position, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens are respectively placed. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which made it visible. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back lower movable decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the back unit to the first ascending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 197 and moved to the second ascending position. As another embodiment of the game board, an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the back upper movable production unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for illuminating the stage of the center accessory and the back front lower center lens of the back front decoration unit. Is. In the back-up movable production unit in the back unit of the game board, the back-up rotation base unit is set to the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens, the first right movable decorative lens, and the back of the back-up first decorative body unit are set. The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper upper third decorative body unit are in the open positions, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows the 1st fixed decorative lens, the 2nd fixed decorative lens, and the 3rd fixed decorative lens in a viewable state. A third effect operation unit is attached to the plate unit instead of the effect operation unit so that the first decorative surface of the decorative rotating body unit faces forward, and the front view of the pachinko machine showing the game board in the normal state. is there. In FIG. 201, with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, the back-up rotating base unit is set to the vertical position in the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and the back upper third With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit in the open positions, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens can be visually recognized. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a payout control board and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the peripheral control board and the board connected to it. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 207 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 210. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 213. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball squeeze determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout ball operation judgment setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere motion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error release operation determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from a CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure warning signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with a game state, a reproduced sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or a combination thereof. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the free channel search processing in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of a sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of a production sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each production sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each channel group which shows the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each sound effect which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of a sound in this embodiment. This is the first half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. This is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated for each type of the notification sound illustrated in FIG. 277. (A) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process related to the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content which is determined separately of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than this process, not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the movable body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the situation on the decoration side. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol changes. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorations at two different timings during the period when the design changes. is there. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure in the case where a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of the detection circuit unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) in which the detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows another example (Example 5) which arranged the detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit on a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 6) in which the avoidance part and the detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 7) in which the voltage output part of the magnetic sensor input circuit, the avoidance part, and the detection circuit part are arranged on the main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic structure of the electrical connection of a detection sensor part, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows each example of the arrangement position in the game machine of a panel relay board and a main control board schematically. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the arrangement example of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic structure of the electrical connection about the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a peripheral control board, a drive board, a drive means, and a movable effect body. It is a front view which conceptually showed a plurality of movable accessories for production provided in a game machine, and grouping of a plurality of movable accessories. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01 are restored to the initial positions.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. The vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor caused by the occurrence of contact resistance of the connector member.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the changing game state when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production decorative rotating body unit 530 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111, the door frame left side unit 540, and the door frame right side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the unit 550.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island facilities (not shown in a box shape) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is moved according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a pair of left and right lower speakers 921 (lower part) provided on the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. After the speaker unit 920 having the left speaker 921L and the lower right speaker 921R), the power supply board box 930 attached to the right side of the front view behind the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 that is mounted on the side and houses an interface control board inside, and a payout that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls inside. It includes a payout control board box 950 in which the control board 951 is housed.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and divides the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. When the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. The vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. There is.

The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and a curtain plate. The upper part on the left end side of the member 50 in front view and the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The outer frame 2 has a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and has both ends. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 attached to each of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain plate member. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. ing.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. The upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

The lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, they are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. The lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached into the protruding portions 32 and 42.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion 57 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And have. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. The front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and an operation portion protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward from the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 is fully occupied. It can be in a through state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, and therefore, from the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame. Almost no load is applied to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction of moving to the right, the right surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be in a held (locked) state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 further pushes the tip of the illegal tool. Since it can be folded back forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be reliably stopped.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame above the dish unit 320. The door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left portion of the base unit 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player, and an effect image is displayed to the player. It can be presented. Although the details of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described later, a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player and a door frame that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display the effect image. It is equipped with a side effect display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 540 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) provided on the left and right, and the top middle decoration member protruding forward in the center of the front surface. It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the lower front corner, the dish unit 320 to which the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame left side unit is attached to the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and a through hole attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit 210 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. A ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 are provided.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424 (heat source), pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display) The device 461), a pair of upper speakers 573, and the like are provided with a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

The door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. For the upper plate that penetrates back and forth between the plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through port 111 and allows the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward. At the passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper corners of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates the front and rear and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in a columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and a door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and includes a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the side view shape is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When the operator holds a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is used. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame lower hinge pin of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. In the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151, a mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height lower than the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. It includes a substrate 162 and.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit mounting member 170 Even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit 172, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base portion 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally lifted.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. The security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a lock unit 700 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 on the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted into 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. With a ball pulling member 253 having a partition portion 253a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and which partitions the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball pulling member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

In the ball feed unit 250, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 253 on the left side of the ball extraction port 251b in front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323 are on the upstream end side. It is formed so as to close the part that is open to the rear of the door from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end on the opposite side of the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating rod portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 253b, and the rotating rod portion 253b below the operating rod 253c. It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. The ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It rotates with the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball that has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

The ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 in which the tip swings in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an extended axis and rotates a ball feed member 254 around an extended axis in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds balls. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operating rod 256 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255, the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

The ball pulling member 253, which is rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 250, is subjected to a moment such that it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the weight portion 253d, but the operation is projected forward. Since the rotation of the rod 253c is restricted by abutting the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the partition of the ball removing member 253 is normally used. The portion 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating plate 253c also moves relatively downward. When the actuating rod 253c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, so that it is on the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

The ball feed unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B, etc.) recessed forward in the upper right when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the mounting recess is formed. A fraud prevention member 260 is installed in the 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The lower piece portion 262 and the inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in the front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250 by the ball launcher 680 and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 became narrower. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway 862 of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

The foul cover unit 270 is a game that opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full-tank ball receiving port 274 and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 275 that receives the ball (foul ball) and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and are received by the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are released forward. In addition, the dish unit 320 is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center side of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 is movable so as to move away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and is attached to the taxiway opening / closing door 863 of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the actuating protrusion 863e can contact is provided (see FIG. 131). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to drive gears on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 that meshes with a drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a handle base 301 and an inner base having a detection shaft 307a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 306. It is provided with a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the two.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 around the axis extending back and forth, and the single-shot button 311 that detects the pressing operation and is attached to the handle base 301. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed like this and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid 682 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive is controlled and the game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (not shown). ) Stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311, the driving before the single-shot button 311 is operated. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the clockwise direction in the front view. The position of the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"). By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect decorative rotating body unit 530, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower plate 322 that can be stored is provided.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the left and right centers bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

The plate unit 320 is mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 so that it can be pressed and operated from above, and the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327 on the right side of the front view. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the ball lending button 328, the ball lending button 328 and the return. The ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the button 329, and the effect selection attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. It is provided with a left button 331, an effect selection right button 332, and a lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. There is.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Is submerged (see FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate 321a from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction is narrowed is lowered downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of stored game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326 covering the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and the lower plate main body 325 are opened. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape similar to a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base, the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is abbreviated from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (directing decoration rotating body unit 530) from the vicinity of the front left end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is directed decoration in the front view. It is located behind the rotating body unit 530. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the area of the crosshatch in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d (the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It has a shaded area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in the plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the staging decorative rotating body unit 530. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in the front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 includes the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the front end side of the plate, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, the storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. With this lower plate cover 340, when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d, the fingertip is placed on the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A). You can prevent it from touching.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, it is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is this. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately lowered from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without entering the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. It can be discharged to (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for payout. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 is contained in the lower plate 322. Even if the supplied game ball jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is a directing decoration. It is possible to prevent the rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) from being damaged by the game ball.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 has an inclined bottom surface. By climbing, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

In the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 that make up the lower plate 322 are disassembled separately, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 cannot be disassembled. It may be an integral part. An example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, but the cover standing wall of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The part 340a may stand up. An example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotation body unit 530A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is shown. A lower plate 322 not provided with the above plate may be used.

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) is shown to have a uniform surface shape without through holes, but a plurality of through holes through which the game ball cannot pass. It may have. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. A light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k), which are separately formed. However, these four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide on the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole on the rear right side (lower plate second region A2) of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The 322a and the 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided behind the covering wall such as the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is located in and is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. ..

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the same manner as above, in the rear side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2). It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound during reflection may be used. The return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 which is the lower plate second region A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). ) Is placed so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j (the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 and the effect decorative rotating body unit 530) in which the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) is housed, more than the main body unit 325A. The space behind the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) protrudes into the space. As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. The first extension portion 325B is formed with a relief portion 322b in the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wider than that. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is a main body portion 325A and a main body portion 325A which form a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and have the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is attached to the right side of the lower plate and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and has a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. A lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B and the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. The first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (attachment space 326j) between the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 and the rear surface of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. It is formed so as to create a space).

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, it is moved to the rear (inside the mounting space 326j) of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the above can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A), but the dividing line PL is shown. The PL may be arranged on the boundary line between the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the lower plate is provided in the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C. A ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

In the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the storage area for the game ball is shown on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have the above may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

The plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball feed guide. After hanging from the lower side of the road 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. Between the ball pulling taxiway 323f that guides the game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower end of the ball feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball feeding taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball feeding taxiway 323e. There is an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at the height of the ball feed unit 250, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and protrudes so that the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 faces rearward. I have. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f opens into a tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a tubular rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is located behind the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. It is arranged so that when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operating unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and a large opening in the center in the left-right direction to mount the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and the left and right of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 on both sides, and the plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed on the lower side of each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b. I have.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at a height. The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the end portion of the plate unit cover 326 on the left-right direction center side and the left and right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. The lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined to move upward in the left-right direction (directing operation). It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right both ends, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The plate unit cover 326 is open forward at the portion of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a, and provides a mounting space 326j into which the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A) is inserted (accommodated). I have. The plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

The ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is in contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. .. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is provided with an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission portion 327a of the upper plate ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission unit 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the lent out game ball is deducted and the cash or prepaid card is returned.

Although not shown, the ball lending display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are used in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, which are arranged in the game area 5a in the front view. When the effect image prompting the person to select is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select the desired option. Is.

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 under the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 is housed in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the bottom plate portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 also opens, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

When the lower plate ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is open, pressing the lower plate ball removing button 333 rearward releases the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. It can be done.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 are produced. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. , The base unit 430 which is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430 which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying a cage effect image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. The button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b and the like.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By performing the pressing operation against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is closed by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is larger than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from the position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and the portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. , 423b, and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect decorative rotating body unit 530), the left and right side portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the notch portions 416c are attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). .. Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. , 423b, and the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration, respectively. ing.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the decorative rotating body unit 530.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 (heat source) attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the second lenses are respectively. The LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In the state of being assembled to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

The decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect decorative rotating body unit 530.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decorative member 432 that is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

The base unit 430 is provided in the four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, the three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder 439. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to each of them to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the unit base 431 is provided.

The outer shape of the unit base 431 is substantially circular, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outside of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is in the clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees to. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

The unit base 431 includes a light-shielding wall portion 431c that projects forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the front upper portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 is attached on the operation button and a portion on which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached. ing. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decoration portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By illuminating the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, the interior of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white.

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 have one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side on the front surface of the unit base 431. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. Connection between 435, decorative board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460, and the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. Is for relaying.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

In the state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the peripheral wall portion of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. It projects into the 432a (see FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the effect presented to the player.

The overall height of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The overall width of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, is between the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. So, it is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing decorative rotating body unit 530). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. There is. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 has the frame unit at the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the 415.

In the normal state, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is located from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 to the front. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL is attached to the button 410 at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is shown by a white arrow in FIG. In addition, a portion away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is such that the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is suspended. Is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Therefore, the entire effect decorative rotating body unit 530 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. Since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below the position where the player can easily press the operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), it is strong against the player who presses the operation button 410. The vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. , The mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like can be bent downward to absorb the impact. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment of the dish unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the operation button 410 or the effect Since the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage the game hall side. The increase in burden can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed.

Since the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a By the decoration of the button lens 411, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral portion of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is composed of the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the above are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 as a whole.

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other because they are arranged in a concentric circle. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a With the decoration part 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the uneven line of the second button and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 plays a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown to a person, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

The effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

In the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, which is the second embodiment of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect decoration rotating body unit 530. Similar to the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the same components as the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described below with the same reference numerals.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base is visible from the player side through the 420, the second base unit 450 which is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the operation button 410. It includes a door frame side second effect display device 460A attached to the unit 450 and capable of displaying an effect image, and a buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, and a switching drive motor 492 (heat source). This is for relaying the connection between the projector 500 and the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. .. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A and the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the button base. The shape of the guide boss portion 413c of 413 is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is located at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412, and one toward the center side of the button lens 411. A triangle with a right angle and a triangle with one right angle to the opposite side of the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button in the truss-like pattern. A right-angled triangular shape composed of a base facing the center of the lens 411, a side extending from both ends of the bottom to the center of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. And the hypotenuse of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right angle from the tip of that side. It is formed by a modified isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of the triangular pattern.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and has the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is attached with the operation button 410 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is attached to.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring in which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that is a substantially quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed and penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front to the rear of the main body portion 451a in a blind hole shape, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear at the lower part of the main body portion 451a A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a and the lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) shape to regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is in the clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees to. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front end of these operation button springs abuts on the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation button 410 is inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. It is urging forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular shape are coaxially located. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front surface is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. doing. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is arranged in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470 and the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be visually displayed (projected) by the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes outward in the axial direction from the center of both ends in a columnar shape. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. Subscreen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.), which is transparent and formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and subscreen 472, which is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends of the main screen 471 in the axial direction are decorated so as to be bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer circumference to the center side, and the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction and the inside of the peripheral decoration portion 472a are closed. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The general screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the general screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 from the front and mounted rotatably.

The actuating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled to the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. ..

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the general screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is intricately refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Is implemented. The outer shape of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the subscreen decorative member 476, and the surface is white. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light with the sub-screen 472, when the LED 477a is made to emit light, the LED 477a is emitted. The player can recognize the point light source of. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire semi-cylindrical shape and attracts the attention of the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 in the center on the back side. The purpose is to display an effect image that is projected onto the sub-screen decorative member 476 and brightly colors the surroundings of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the operation button 410 is pressed by the player by the light emitting decoration of the sub-screen decorative member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage people.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are united in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. A frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481 is provided. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to rotate satisfactorily between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is assembled on the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. positioned. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image onto the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The cushioning unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is hit from above to reduce the impact of the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of the unit cover 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and a leg piece that projects downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extends in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In the cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 is further moved downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-shaped main body 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in the operation button 410 to entertain the player, and the player can be made to operate the operation button 410 to participate in the effect presented to the player. It is a thing.

The total height of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The overall width of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is attached to the dish unit 320 with the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. A gap is formed between the two. That is, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is vertical. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the line so as to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is above the plate unit 320 (second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the arranged game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation buttons 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation buttons 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is provided in the four tubular guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410. Each is slidably inserted and urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, in a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is set to the frame by the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion of the unit 415 on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, in a normal state, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 is from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A of the present embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is attached so as to be tilted with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is attached. The distant portion will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is pressed at a position away from the center, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 is straightened backward. You can move to. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the part farthest from the mounted part is used. Since the vibration is generated, the entire second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where it is relatively easy for the player to press and operate, strong vibration is transmitted to the player who is pressing and operating the operation button 410. It can be made to surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 and the dish unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are attached. A cushioning unit 510 is arranged between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, etc. Can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. Since the operation button 410 and the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest and damage. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed.

Since the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the plurality of triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer circumference of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be present on the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is a door frame side second effect display device by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. in the 460A, pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the player. It is formed so that it cannot be seen from the side. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can be improved.

In the state where the main screen 471 is facing forward in the first position, the screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 and the screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The sub-screen decorative member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player by performing a movement exceeding the player's expectation in the button 410, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

As described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of triangles, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of quadrangles and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the position of the player's eyes is aligned. As they move, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, allowing the player to see the moving decorations, and also to show the players a deep, three-dimensional decoration. Can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the driving of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74A, the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction from the front. When viewed, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of the above. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the entire front side of the sub-screen 472 can be obscured. Can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decorative effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can draw the player a strong attention to the sub-screen 472. In this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (at higher brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, so that a partially high-brightness effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device is displayed. It is possible to make the player strongly attract the attention of the player, and at the same time, it is possible to display a production image that makes the player more entertaining.

In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction while the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472. When the sub-screen 472 is changed to the main screen 471, while the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, the portion located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 is displayed. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect is produced in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

As described above, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A is decorated with the screen unit 470 (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) in the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. ), Since the decoration with movement and three-dimensional effect can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 of the decorative board unit 420 is behind the second button decorative part 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has the second LED 422b and the operation button of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

In the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

The second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. It is possible to switch to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 to display the effect image, and to present to the player an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall configuration of the third embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, which is the third embodiment of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. 78 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78 (b) is a right side surface of the third effect operation unit. It is a figure. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 and the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A. The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be pressed by the player in the same manner as the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the same components as the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described below with the same reference numerals.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The third base is visible from the player side through the 420, the third base unit 520 which is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the operation button 410. It includes a decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the unit 520.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. .. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411.

The operation button 410 of the third delivery decorative rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The frame-shaped frame main body 416 having the portion 416c and attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b are attached from the rear side. It includes a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416c.

The frame unit 415 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and has the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the first LED 422a and the first LED 423a capable of emitting and decorating only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. It includes a second LED 422b and a second LED 423b that can illuminate and decorate only the lens 417.

The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, and has the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. Is.

The third base unit 520 is composed of a housing wall portion 521a that is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and is hemispherically recessed rearward in the central portion, and a blind hole that is opened forward on the outside of the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having one holding hole 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 521, and four inserted into each of the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521. The operation button spring 523, the three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, the three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the unit. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 attached to the rear side of the base 521 and the relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526. And have.

The third base unit 520 includes an effect operation unit first drive motor 528 (heat source) attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521 and a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. It includes a first drive gear (not shown), and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 described later.

The outer shape of the unit base 521 is substantially circular, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. In addition to the accommodating wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, the unit base 521 accommodates the accommodating wall portion 521c, which projects forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached at the upper front surface. A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from substantially the center in the vertical direction on the left outer side of the accommodating wall portion 521a, and accommodating so as to face the left protruding portion 521e. 521g of the right protruding portion 521f projecting forward from substantially the center of the wall portion 521a in the vertical direction, 521g of the left shaft portion extending in a columnar shape to the right from the left protruding portion 521e, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. It is provided with a right bearing portion 521h that penetrates the right protruding portion 521f coaxially with respect to the axis (first axis CL1).

The accommodating wall portion 521a that is hemispherically recessed rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so that substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be accommodated without contacting the recessed front surface side.

The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the accommodating wall portion 521a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 521b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 521b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 521b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. The holding hole 521b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 521b is in the clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees to. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the two upper holding holes 521b, respectively. ..

The light-shielding wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. It is for doing.

The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. It is a thing. In the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably inserted therein. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with respect to the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 allow the decorative rotating body unit 530 to be rotatably mounted around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs. The front surface of the rame top lens decorative substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LED is a full-color LED.

The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 521b in the unit base 521. When the operation button spring 523 is assembled to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. The operation button 410 is urged forward by these operation button springs 523.

The three pressure detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 525 have one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other one on the lower left side on the front surface of the unit base 521. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 521b of the above via the sensor holder 524, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 521, outside the decorative rotating body unit 530, and on the left outer side (right side of the front view) of the accommodating wall portion 521a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decorative board 522, a pressure detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. , The effect operation unit of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second drive motor 534 (heat source), the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 (not shown). It is for relaying the connection with (omitted).

The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 527a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 527a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent excessive force from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like to prevent their damage.

The first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521 g of the unit base 521 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. And the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontally direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the rear. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and can show the player a movable effect through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the figure, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed to have a substantially spherical outer surface shape as a whole.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 (decorative movable body) is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has a disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531 and a disk-shaped rotating body base. The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of one surface of the unit 531 and the first decorative surface portion 532 of the rotating body base unit 531 are rotatably attached to the outside of the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532. , The second decorative surface portion 533, which is different in decoration from the first decorative surface portion 532, and the effect operation unit No. 1 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, which are mounted in the rotating body base unit 531. It includes a two-drive motor 534 (see FIG. 83).

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) capable of irradiating light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. , Heat source) is mounted on the surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535, and the light is directed toward the second decorative surface 533. It is provided with a second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitting bodies) capable of irradiating the light are mounted. The driver circuit itself of the mounted LED is not mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the mounted LED is outside the decorative rotating body unit 530. The energization is controlled by the provided driver circuit. When the driver circuit is provided externally in this way, the driver circuit can be less affected by the heat generated by the LED.

The rotating body base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and the inside is hollow. The rotating body base unit 531 is attached to a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520 and the center of the rotating body gear 531a. The left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side into which the left shaft portion 521g is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable and the left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side protrude in a cylindrical shape from the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side to the rotating body gear 531a so that the left shaft portion 521g can be relatively rotated in the right bearing portion 521h. It includes a right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side to be inserted, and a stopper 531d protruding outward on the base end side of the right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side.

The rotating body gear 531a, the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center of the rotating body base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with respect to the uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to abut on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotating body unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angle range (here, 180 degrees).

The rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylinder portion 531e that extends concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center and extends in a cylindrical shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f that decorate the outer peripheral surface. I have. The bearing cylinder portion 531e has a shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 inserted therein, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by bushes attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and can decorate the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 to improve the appearance. As shown in FIG. 87B, the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can release the heat inside the rotating body base unit 531 to the outside, but considers the amount of heat generated by the LED built in the rotating body base unit 531. If this is the case, further cooling control is desired as a result of trying to realize a gorgeous effect using this LED.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decoration portion 532a composed of predetermined characters provided in the center of the bulging surface and a translucent first decorative portion 532a formed radially around the logo decoration portion 532a. A translucent first sub-decoration that is formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b, and the outer peripheral end forms the circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d projecting from the back surface in a columnar shape along the center are provided.

The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length that extends to the opposite side through the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 in a state of being assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is the first axis. The state coincides with the second axis CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 can rotate around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

On the other hand, the second decorative surface portion 533 is arranged between the rotating decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotating decorative portion 533a, and the rotating body base unit 531 and is a rotating body. It is provided with a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to the base unit 531. Since the rotary decoration portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

The rotary decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decoration portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of lines extending radially. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b are partially translucent, and are light-emitting decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is installed in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotating shaft of the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 connects the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotary decorative surface portion 533a) via the second drive gear 534a, the decorative surface portion gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

The front surface of the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 is white, and the mounted LEDs are configured to develop full color.

In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction with the second axis CL2 as the center. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. The action and effect of the third effect operation unit Next, the action and effect of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and FIG. 88 (b) shows (a) with the central axis of the operation button extended. It is an explanatory view seen from the direction of the face. FIG. 89A is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and FIG. 89B is the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which turned forward.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player operate the operation button 410 and having the player participate in the player participation type production presented to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the height of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is formed at almost the same height. The overall width of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state where the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 which is the bottom surface is the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A gap is formed between them. That is, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the central axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is vertical. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the line so as to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is above the plate unit 320 (third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the arranged game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, respectively, and the operation button spring 523 moves forward. Being urged. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 and the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A by the urging force of the operation button spring 523. Similarly, the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is in contact with a portion of the frame unit 415 on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is located from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment is attached. As with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 and the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A, the operation button 410 is attached with the central axis CL tilted with respect to the vertical line, so that the player can use the conventional pachinko machine. Similarly, when the operation button 410 is pressed from above, a portion away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed as shown by the white arrow in FIG.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 is straightened backward. You can move to. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the part farthest from the mounted part is used. Since the vibration is generated, the entire third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position where it is relatively easy for the player to press and operate, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing and operating the operation button 410, and the player can be affected. You can surprise and entertain the production.

Further, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the dish unit. Since a gap is formed between the cover 326 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. During that time, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, so that the impact can be absorbed. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is restricted, and the effect operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the operation button 410 And the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B and the like are not damaged, so that the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed, and the damage is made difficult. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it may be a flat plate shape. Compared to this, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Since the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Due to the uneven decoration of the button lens 411, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Although the gap between them is located, the gap on the outer circumference of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be made difficult to see from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. .. As a result, even if the rotating decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. The decorative rotating body unit 530 can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has a first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and a second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 on the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on them, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting and decorated in the operation button 410. When the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are light-emitting decorated, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with a tubular main body portion 413a that surrounds the outer circumference of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the light from the decorative rotating body unit 530 is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate in the decorative board unit 420. The first LED 422a of the 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be made to. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is located between the inner cylinder and the inner cylinder (see FIGS. 52 and 83), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is emitted from the inside of the main body 413a (on the side of the decorative rotating body unit 530) and the inner cylinder. It does not leak to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has a second LED 422b and an operation button of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs. From the lower side of the portion of the third base unit 520 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 of the unit base 521 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 521c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be visually recognized from the front. In the normal state, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is directed forward as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). In a normal state, the logo decoration portion 532a having a directional rotation position around the second axis CL2 on the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated and stationary in a state of facing the correct direction.

In a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in a normal state, the stopper 531d restricts the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves backward with respect to the horizontally extending first axis CL1.

In this normal state, the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is passed through the first driving gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 so that the upper portion thereof moves forward. When the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d comes into contact with the front surface below the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation is restricted. At the same time, the rotational drive by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

Although not shown, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 is based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotation position is controlled.

When the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of being well visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially coincides with the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface portion gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated at the same time (see FIG. 89). In other words, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 that is orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can be done.

Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, and the first is based on the detection of the rotation detection sensor. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at arbitrary rotation positions. Therefore, even if the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is provided like the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotation can be stopped at a position corresponding to the directionality, so that the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. It is possible to surely exert the decorativeness without being damaged.

The third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B uses the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided on the decorative rotating body unit 530 to form the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Each can be luminescent and decorated. The light emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. This can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 which is orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes a rotating decorative portion 533a and a non-rotating fixed decorative portion 533b, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotating decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, a part of the light radiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is a non-transmissive portion or a colored portion of the rotating rotating decorative portion 533a. It will be interrupted periodically by the above, and it will be possible to show the player a flickering flashing light emitting decoration, which will strongly attract the player's interest.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decoration portion 532a is directed forward.

As an example of the movable effect of rotating only around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, the first drive gear (not shown) is changed from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90A) by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. (Omitted) Through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotating body gear 531a, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle, and the first decoration It is assumed that the second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 faces forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the second decorative surface portion 533 moves from above and appears while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 suddenly switches to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

As a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit 1st is such that the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the right side view from the normal state. The drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 can be slightly seen with the plurality of peripheral decorative surface portions 531f sandwiched above the first decorative surface portion 532. Therefore (see FIG. 90B), the player can strongly attract the attention of the player to the second decorative surface portion 533 that appears and disappears when the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates. (Ii) Depending on whether or not the decorative surface portion 533 faces forward, the player's expectation for the arrival of an opportunity can be increased. After that, by returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the original state (state of FIG. 90A), it is possible to make the player suggest that the chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is facing forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that an opportunity will come, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

As a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward. Since the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are obscured, a plurality of peripheral surface decorations provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are relatively located. The decoration of the portion 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. By stopping the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 at an intermediate position with the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f facing forward, the player can be made to feel a change in the gaming situation, and the player's expectations for the game can be expected. You can enhance the feeling. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right-angled view from the normal state (see FIG. 90C), and a predetermined angle is centered on the rotation angle. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a range. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more often across the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be exciting and exciting, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

As a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90D), and this state is set. As a reference, a movable effect that operates in the opposite direction to the above can be performed, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels an ascending momentum. This makes it possible to raise expectations for the game, and the upward rotation of the second decorative surface portion 533 causes the player's line of sight to be within the game area 5a above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. It can be directed, and the game and the production in the game area 5a can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

When the above movable effect is executed, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately made to emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 and the second are appropriately emitted. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be more easily seen, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between the decorations. , The premium feeling due to the difference in decoration can be fully exhibited, and those decorations can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. By illuminating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 with light emission decoration, the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410, so that when the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed is executed, It is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type production to entertain.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, the movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is the effect operation unit second drive motor. By 534, it is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, in the clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the directional logo decorative portion 532a.

Effect operation unit As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that was rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 with a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotating decorative surface portion 533a) becomes the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating counterclockwise in the opposite direction, so it can have a strong impact on the player, attract the player's attention strongly, and something to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

As a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, it rotates around the second axis CL2 on the upper side of the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of peripheral decorative surfaces 531f that are not used can be seen, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 can be slightly seen above the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates around the first axis CL1 to strongly attract the player's attention to the visible and hidden second decorative surface portion 533, and the second decorative surface portion Whether or not the 533 faces forward can raise the player's expectation for the arrival of an opportunity. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. When the face portion 533 is turned forward (the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)) and the player is in the desired state, it is possible to convince the player that an opportunity has arrived, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to. After turning the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is in the correct direction. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532, which can suggest the arrival of an opportunity and raise the player's expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

As a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is moved from the state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are kept rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Rotate the rotating body base unit 531 by 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 faces forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). As a result, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward. Since they are located and are in a state of moving so as to move in the same direction, the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be made unclear. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched between them. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f to enjoy the decoration. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 to move the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 forward. In the state facing toward (see FIG. 91 (c)), the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is rotated a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around that state. To rotate forward and reverse. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side, each of which is rotating around the second axis CL2, can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more, sandwiching the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Therefore, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, which entertains the player and suppresses the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. By setting the surface portion 533 to face forward (the state shown in FIG. 91B), the same effects as described above can be obtained.

As a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from a normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL from a state in which the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward or from a normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 after the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2. Based on this state (see FIG. It is also possible to perform a movable effect of the above-mentioned operation, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 with respect to the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, the player can feel the ascending momentum, the expectation for the game can be increased, and the second axis line. By moving the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 upward, the player's line of sight can be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, and the game area can be directed. It is possible to entertain the game and the production within 5a and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is set to reverse rotation in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocated within a predetermined angle range. The rotation speed of the decorative rotating body unit 530 by the first drive motor 528 around the first axis CL1 and the second axis of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the second drive motor 534 of the carry-out operation unit. The rotation speed may be the same as the rotation speed around CL2, or may be different. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of the movable effect by the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, and the abundant variations of the movable effect make it difficult for the player to get bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest. be able to.

When the above movable effect is executed, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 are appropriately emitted to emit light and rotate around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state where the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 is blinking due to the periodic light blocking by the rotating decorative portion 533a. It can be luminescent and decorated with light. In this way, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated in various ways, the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed and operated. At the time of execution, it is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player participation type production to entertain.

[3-4h-8. Heat exhaust action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged behind the operation button 410 is the unit base 521 (accommodation wall portion 521a) of the operation button 410 and the third base unit 520. ), And the front and rear are arranged in the closed space AS in the button (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the front and rear are formed in the accommodating wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, the button interior space AS communicates with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is mounted through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably attached to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 that rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f made of through-hole-shaped decorations are formed, and through these peripheral surface decorative portions 531f, the inside and the outside of the rotating body base unit 531 are formed. Are communicating with each other.

Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 rotatably attached around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating wind when rotated.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B having the above configuration, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are operated with the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward. When the unit second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 of the accommodating wall portion 521a covering the rear portion. Through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d, it will escape to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92A). By this wind flow, the air in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside to be ventilated. Since the space inside the button AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit can be used for the plurality of peripheral surface decorations. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B (inside the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320) through the portion 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d. As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

In the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B of the present embodiment, with the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are subjected to the effect operation unit No. When the two drive motors 534 rotate in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodating wall portion 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the accommodating wall portion 521a escapes to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92B). Due to this wind flow, the air in the space AS in the button in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated, so that the air is installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is passed through the plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d to the rear of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B (mounting of the dish unit 320). It can be discharged into the space 326j). As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodation wall portion 521a in the unit base 521 is passed through the exhaust ports (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340, and the pachinko machine 1 It is discharged to the outside of.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. FIG. 97A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 540 is a strip-shaped left unit base 541 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 541. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 542 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 544, and the left unit lower decorative base 545, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 546.

The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 541a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 541, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffuser lens member 542 has a circular lens portion 542a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the quadrangular opening 541a. It includes a lens unit 542b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With the circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear can be irradiated forward in a point shape. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be light-emittingly decorated by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflector portion 542c that is concave rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffuse lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffuse reflector portion 542c on the front surface. , The input lens portion 542e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface that moves forward as a whole away from the input lens portion 542e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 542f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 542c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. The front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflecting portion 542f of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

In the state where the square lens portion 542b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

In the square lens unit 542b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 542e into the square lens unit 542b. Since the input lens unit 542e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflector 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 542c (direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160). ), It travels in the square lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 542c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 inside the square lens portion 542b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 542f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 542c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 100). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 542c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 542f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 542b through the front diffusion lens portion 542d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffusion lens portion 542d and the front reflection portion 542f, the square lens portion 542b divides a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides the plurality of concentric grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 542b has a shade of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 by the light that the circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. Each of them is luminescent and decorated by the light.

The decorative base 544 on the left unit is a quadrangle having a front view extending vertically, and is formed in a square tube shape extending forward and backward. The portion of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative base 544 on the left unit is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 544 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 545 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 544 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 545, the lower end of the upper dog-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower dog-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 547 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 101 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 105 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 101 (a), and FIG. 105 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 101 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a sheet that is attached to the right surface of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 and is decorated. It includes a right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached to the left side so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. Before and after the lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover 563. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portions 553e are centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. As shown in FIG. 105, the main body portion 553a moves slightly to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front, slightly with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is tilted. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ..

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

The light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. The Rukoto. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left shading member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light reflected in the direction and passing through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

In the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to surround the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Since the light is arranged alternately in the direction, it is possible to prevent the light radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) from becoming light having a shade of concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 becomes transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. As shown in FIG. 105, the main body portion 556a moves slightly to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front, slightly with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ..

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

The light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. The Rukoto. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light reflected in the direction and passing through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

In the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to surround the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Since the light is arranged alternately in the direction, it is possible to prevent the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decorative member 557 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left shading member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right shading member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left shading member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 105, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 decorates the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the middle LED 552c, which prevent the light from interfering with each other and correspond to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561, respectively. Can be luminescent and decorated only by.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 540 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion of playing in a private room, and other players around him can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if they are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, they are along the island facilities. It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109 and the like. FIG. 106A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 106. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through opening 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 574 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top interior decorative member 576 and the front surface. The door frame top interior decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted and the unit body 574 are attached to the front of each, and the plurality of slits 574b are closed respectively, and from the vicinity of the left and right ends of the top interior decoration member 576. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending across the opening 574a to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member, respectively, which are attached to each of the above and cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578. Top middle left decorative member 581 and top middle that are attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 from the front side of each of the 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It includes a right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 574, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 574 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 574. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and to the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and the unit body 574 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574. It is provided with a lower cover 592 attached to the door.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 574 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 574 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 574, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are connected to the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 574 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits 574b extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. It is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion obliquely extending forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. I have. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square in the left-right direction is located downward, and a deformed pentagon extending outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. It is mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 574 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the irregularities of the square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574. Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574. Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 574. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right-angled lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled on the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The right decorative substrate 587 on the top of the door frame is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the center of the left and right sides of the unit main body 574 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 connects the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. , The top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 are formed so as to extend. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 by means of a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The light from the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and The entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect decorative rotating body unit 530 (second effect decorative rotation) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 protruding forward under the through hole 111. The body unit 530A) is provided, and the front surface (the front surface of the plate front lower decoration portion 326c) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 is scooped backward. The concave shape (the fronts of the left and right sides of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 are located behind the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. It is formed in a concavely curved shape). As a result, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 stands out to the player. It can be emphasized and the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 can be strongly noticed.

The door frame 3 is arranged so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward from the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111. Since it is installed in an inclined state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to produce a decorative rotation. Looking at the body unit 530, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly visually recognized, raising expectations for the production using the operation button 410. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed. it can.

Since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, the operation button can be moved by moving a hand for a short distance. Any part of the 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, but also to the left or right. Alternatively, it can be operated satisfactorily even from the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the effect using the operation button 410.

Since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the game state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player. The effect using the operation button 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing decorative rotating body unit 530) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, it is higher than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 under the plate 321 becomes less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, which strongly attracts the player's interest. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

The door frame 3 wraps the lower plate 322 toward the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d opening on the left side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or hangs his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction and on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530) in the front view. .. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the front end side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Therefore, assuming that the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. As soon as the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

In the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a rises. Since the wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball extraction hole. It can be guided to 322a, or reflected on the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

The door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect decorative rotating body unit 530) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the above can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. When the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass generated by the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the player can feel the vibration. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Since the door frame 3 includes a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and projects greatly forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right Since the side unit 550 can exert an action like a partition between the side unit 550 and the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it seems that the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion of a feeling, and to let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and the fronts of the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are rearward. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out (rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through hole 111. However, since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration has a sophisticated feel. This makes it more prominent than other pachinko machines, and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

Since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And effect decoration When the rotating body unit 530 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out game balls to the user side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body frame that is openably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

The main body frame base 600 has a launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view and front and rear on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604. For the door frame of the board unit 900, which penetrates the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 on the lower left side. For a circular speaker that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. It includes an opening 607.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and is an upper hinge mounting portion 609 for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. And a lower hinge mounting portion 610 is provided.

The main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. It is provided with a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The hinge hole 644 for the door frame for axially supporting the door frame and the hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame 3 It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is at a certain interval above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. The reinforcing frame 660 has a left positioning that regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. A set of members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600 can be reinforced by this reinforcing frame 660, and into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110, 112 and 113. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. The game ball struck by the hitting mallet 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 275 of the lower rail cover unit 270, passes through the rail cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that project forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 that project rearward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and a columnar project from the lower part of the unit base 701 to the front. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It is provided with a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 132. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 118A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. FIG. 120A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). FIG. 124 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 124 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. ..

FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 126 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 130A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 130B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game ball to the left, the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 132) that hangs swingably from above aligns the game balls in two front and rear rows.

The payout unit 800 is a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a payout unit below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. It has. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 with the door is provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the 821b, the ball guidance inlet 821a, and the ball guidance outlet 821b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. The front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass through at the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending obliquely from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822 g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction when assembled to the ball guidance unit 820. There is.

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825c, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It includes a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is in a state of protruding into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. The guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). When the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (to the right in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the inner surface of the guide passage 821c. Match. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the movable piece 826a, and the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g The guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (to the left in the front view). When the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (to the right in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the inner surface of the guide passage 822c. Match. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 132). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

When the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with the guide passages. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

The ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece. Since the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the rear 826 members are detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member front 825 or The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight As a result, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Since a metal screw as a weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are through holes, the weight can be moved even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. By simply screwing the metal screws into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e, the weight can be easily mounted on the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member, so that the labor of mounting the weight can be simplified. , The cost related to the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the 826 after the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the game can be played promptly. By replenishing the balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be distributed to the payout passage 831d. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c to allow game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped product with an open front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a payout that is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

The payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 that is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has an open rear side, and a front that is mounted inside the front box 831 and has a rotating shaft that penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and are rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 that meshes with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear end is A shaft member 838 that penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 that is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and in the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is provided with a payout blade 834 that is arranged and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 834. ..

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 834 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, the payout passages 831d and 832d, and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 which is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side surface of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 834 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

The front box 831 has a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d, and is formed on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view to remove a ball. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for slidably mounting the lever 844 up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 834 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a is further extended from a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

The rear box 832 has a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed on the upper part of the right side surface in front view to remove a ball. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for slidably mounting the lever 844 up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 834 is arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c which is cylindrically projected rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the payout blade 834. ..

The payout blades 834 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 834a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 834a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 834b and the plurality (three) of the front blades 834b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 834a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 834a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. (3) The rear blade 834c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 834a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 834d.

The front blades 834b and the rear blades 834c of the payout blades 834 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 834c rotate with respect to the front blades 834b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 834 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 834e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c).

The diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 834b and the rear blades 834c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 834a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 834a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder 834a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 834e) between the front blades 834b (rear blade 834c) is It is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 834b and the rear blades 834c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 834e is 0.1 to 0, which is the outer diameter of the game ball. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 834e) between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) (ball accommodating portion 834e).

In the payout blade 834 of the present embodiment, the front blade 834b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 834c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. The payout blades 834 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 834 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. At the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 834 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 834, and the game ball is played from the outer circumferences of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 834e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 834 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball accommodating portion 834e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 834 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Is released downward from.

In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 834e makes 1/7 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of about 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 834 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 834 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 834e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and the lower part is bent to form a front-viewing shape, and the main body portion 843a and the upper end of the main body portion 843a extend in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 124), which is formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion that is bent in a box shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball pulling movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the payout device 830 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 124 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent part, and the lower side of the bent part is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball-extracting movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 124 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball pulling outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole for mounting, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843 (weight). The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the mounting portion 843d). Since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and it relates to the assembly of the pachinko machine 1. The cost can be reduced.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

The upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a portion on the right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. The game ball is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which the ball is distributed, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage 850c. A full tank discharge port 850e that is open downward at a portion other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the normal discharge port, and a full tank discharge port 850e that protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e and is inside the upper sphere storage passage 850c. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the structure to the left and right.

The upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball entering from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper ball pulling passage that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with an outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h are arranged in this order and open downward from the left side in front view. The upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860. Each of the full tank taxiway 862 and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 is opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 132).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that are discharged by the payout device 830 and are discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the section 850f and are fully released. It will be discharged downward from the outlet 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And a full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3 and normal. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It includes a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and discharges it onto the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. The lower ball pulling taxiway 865 is provided.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. The normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. As shown in the figure, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the taxiway 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a and can close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The front view of the actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is urged from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a projecting forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the front end of the pachinko machine 1 assembled, the through ball passage 273 in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 131). Since the taxiway opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 is affected by the urging force of the closing spring 864. It is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 130). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. The game ball will not spill from the road 862.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863, and the operating protrusion 863. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the 863e, a force that tries to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 130 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full tank are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. When a game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 while the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally discharged from the discharge port 850d in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it stays above the section and exceeds the partition 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 and the foul cover. The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the unit 270. After that, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, it is notified that the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. At the same time, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in this state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout device 830 may stop paying out the game ball. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and houses the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 142. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 133 from the front right, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 133 from the front left, and FIG. 136 is a view of the game board from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 137 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in FIG. 133, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU in FIG. 133. Further, FIG. 139 is a front view in which the front unit in the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A game performed by driving a plate-shaped game panel 1100, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and is a function display unit 1400 and a game panel 1100 that are visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side, game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The game is played according to the result of the first special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002, which enables the acceptance of the game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery. The first prize opening 2005, which allows the ball to be accepted, and the second prize, which allows the game ball to be accepted according to the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. It has a mouth 2006 and.

The front unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 on the left side of the front view. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001, and a side slope 2300 that is mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in the front view. , One general winning opening 2001, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, first large winning opening 2005, which is attached to the right side of the front view of the starting port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. And the attacker unit 2400 having the second big winning opening 2006, and the frame shape attached slightly above the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of 3031, the lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the production drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the left side and the lower side of the front view at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back unit attached so as to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a back-up movable effect unit 3500 that is attached, and a back-bottom movable effect unit 3700 that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000, and the right end of the lower right rail 1004. The right rail 1005, which extends from the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clockwise. A backflow prevention member 1007 urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. , Prepared.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

The front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes arranged near the outer circumference and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a length arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has holes and. These fitting holes and elongated holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging steps are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the elongated holes, and the panel plate 1110. Is for engaging and fixing to the panel holder 1120.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It will be on the same side. The front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion is formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the elongated hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion toward the front. It extends and is provided with a plurality of protruding pins that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting and elongated holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the elongated holes of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step portion at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claws are arranged above the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, correspond to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, and project forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. Elastically engages with the engagement step. The engaging claw has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is placed on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends by a predetermined amount toward. By engaging the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws and engaging pieces, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (with the front component 1000) can be mounted. The game panel 1100) can be positioned.

The panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 137) that controls game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to a board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first entrance sensor 2434, a second entrance sensor 2435, and a second start port sensor via a panel relay board 3032. 3113, 1st winning opening sensor 2403, starting opening solenoid 2105, 1st attacker solenoid 2108A, 2nd attacker solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning opening sensor 3111, 1st starting opening sensor 3112, magnetic It is connected to the sensor 2404 and the vibration sensor 2405.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 133 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is attached and the pachinko machine 1 is assembled (see FIG. 200). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402, the normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 are drawn by accepting the game ball. (1) The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that display the result of the special lottery, and the first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002. The second special symbol display 1405 consisting of the device 1404 and eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 and 142. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like. There is.

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the 3010c diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a near the right end of the front view and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The first major winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first major winning opening 2005.

The table unit 2000 is provided with a sub-out port 2007 for discharging a game ball from the game area 5a between the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, the side slope 2300, which is installed above the left end of the side unit 2200 in the front view, and the starting port unit. Attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view of 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the substantially center of the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. is there. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. At the top of the start port unit 2100, the first start port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time.

The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 formed therein, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with a translucent unit main body 2101 and a rear side of the unit main body 2101. It includes a start port decorative substrate 2102 (see FIG. 139) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The start port unit 2100 can illuminate the lower side of the first start port 2002 by emitting the LED of the start port decorative substrate 2102.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the chance exit 2536 at stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the central delivery port 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 144. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 that are always open upward.

The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side, and the three general winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be higher toward the left side in the front view.

By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are below the first starting port 2002 and started. It is in a state of being arranged between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and delivers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guidance unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 144. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that projects forward and extends to the left and right so that the right end side in the front view is lowered.

When the side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf portion 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located on the left. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 is located above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf portion 2301, and is the first of the start port unit 2100. There is a possibility that the game ball will be accepted in any of the three general winning openings 2001 of the starting port 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. FIG. 145 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from the front at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2006, and the sub-out opening 2007. It has.

As shown in FIG. 145 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a base in which the outer shape in front view is inclined so that the right end is located slightly upward, a right side that rises substantially vertically from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having a hypotenuse extending diagonally so as to connect the left end of the base. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow up and down is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. .. The attacker unit 2400 has a second major winning opening 2006 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and a sub-out opening that is always open to the left at the lower left of the second major winning opening 2006. 2007 has been placed. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007, and is always open upward to the lower left of the first large winning opening 2005. The general winning opening 2001 is arranged.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 3113 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004, and a first grand prize opening 2005. It is provided with a first large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the accepted game ball and a second large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006.

The attacker unit 2400 has a second start port door 2411 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball to, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second It is provided with a second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the starting opening 2004.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate passage 2420 extending up and down in the upper right corner of the gate passage 2420 and extending vertically on the left side of the gate passage 2420 to allow the game ball to circulate. The right side passage 2422 extending up and down on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which game balls can flow, and the lower side of the right side passage 2422 to the lower left end side below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. The attacker passage 2423, which extends to the left of the left side passage 2421 and allows the game ball to flow, and the attack ball, which extends to the left so that the left end side is lower than the left side of the attacker passage 2423, guides the game ball. It is equipped with a possible attacker shelf 2424.

In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper part, and the second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower part. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 penetrate between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the attacker passage 2423, the second prize opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In the attacker passage 2423, the second prize opening door 2413 that closes the second prize opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable forms a part of the bottom wall. The lowermost left end side of the attacker passage 2423 opens downward. The second prize opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The attacker shelf 2424 is partially formed by the first prize opening door 2412, which is open to the first prize opening 2005 and closes the first prize opening 2005 so as to be openable and closable. The first grand prize opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. At the right end of the attacker shelf 2424, the sub-out port 2007 is open. One general winning opening 2001 is open at the lower left of the attacker shelf 2424.

The second starting port door 2411 allows the second starting port 2004, which opens forward, to be closed from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. It is installed. The second starting port door 2411 rotates (rotates) so that the upper side moves forward to open the second starting port 2004, close the gate passage 2420, and flow down the inside of the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 is formed so as to rotate by driving a starting port solenoid (not shown), and when the starting port solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the second starting port 2004 is closed and the starting port is closed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the second starting port 2004 is opened.

The first large winning door 2412 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the first large opening is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first prize-winning door 2412 closes the first prize-winning door 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and causes the game ball that has flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 to the left. It is guided to and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. The first prize opening door 2412 opens the first prize opening 2005 by retreating, and the game ball that has flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 etc. is used as the first prize opening 2005. Can be accepted. The first prize-winning door 2412 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a first attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the first prize-winning door 2005 when the first attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). Then, when the first attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the first prize opening 2005 is opened.

The second large winning door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends forward and backward and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the second large opening is opened upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second prize opening door 2413 closes the second prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423, and forms a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any of the 2422s is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. The second big winning opening door 2413 opens the second big winning opening 2006 by retreating, and the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2423 can be accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. The second prize-winning door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a second attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the second prize-winning door 2006 when the second attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). Then, when the second attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the second big winning opening 2006 is opened.

The attacker unit 2400 has an internal passage 2430 through which game balls received in the second prize opening 2006 can be distributed, a first entrance 2431 and a second entrance 2432 opened at the bottom of the internal passage 2430, and the inside. A distribution piece 2433 that distributes the game ball to either the first inlet 2431 or the second inlet 2432 in the passage 2430, and a first inlet sensor 2434 that detects the game ball received in the first inlet 2431. It is provided with a second inlet sensor 2435 that detects a game ball received by the second inlet 2432.

The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second large winning opening sensor 2402. The first entrance 2431 is arranged directly under the portion of the second large winning opening sensor 2402 through which the game ball passes, and the second entrance 2432 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first entrance 2431. .. The distribution piece 2433 is arranged between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is rotatably attached around an axis whose lower side extends back and forth. The distribution piece 2433 stands up vertically to communicate the second prize opening 2006 and the first entrance 2431, and the upper side moves to the left in the front view to the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. It is attached so as to rotate between the state in which the second special winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other by abutting (or approaching). The distribution piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving a distribution solenoid (not shown), and when the distribution solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 and distributed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located directly below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the gate portion. 2003 is located above stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. The first large winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is opened even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. It never passes. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down on the right side of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is arranged is opened upward just below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, it is on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The game ball that has flowed down will enter the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and pass through the gate portion 2003.

The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below the gate portion 2003. At this time, if the second starting door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starting door 2411 and is second. It will be guided to the start port 2004 side and will be accepted by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit"). Since it is driven (sometimes), by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting door 2411, etc., the game ball itself that has been drawn for "normal hit" is accepted into the second starting door 2004. be able to.

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 3113, the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game that has passed through the gate portion 2003. In rare cases, the ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 side through a communicating portion. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 does not necessarily pass in front of the second starting door 2411.

If the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 arranged on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420. It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

The game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 from any of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage 2423, and is downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Is released to. At this time, when the second prize opening door 2413, which closes the second prize opening 2006, is retracted and the second prize opening 2006 is opened, the game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 is released. There is a high probability that it will be accepted into the second prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 is sent to the internal passage 2430 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2402, and is sent to the internal passage 2430 by the distribution piece 2433 to the first entrance 2431 or the second entrance 2432. It is distributed to any of.

The game ball received by the first inlet 2431 or the second inlet 2432 is detected by the first inlet sensor 2434 or the second inlet sensor 2435, and then downwards (board holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is discharged to 1200 above).

Since the width of the left and right sides of the second big winning opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second big winning opening door 2413 retracts and the second big winning opening 2006 Even if it is open, depending on the speed and behavior of the game ball circulating in the attacker passage 2423, the game ball may jump over the second prize opening 2006 and may not be accepted by the second prize opening 2006. ..

The game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 flows down onto the attacker shelf 2424, is guided by the attacker shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, if the first prize opening door 2412 is retracted and the first prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 will be accepted by the first prize opening 2005. .. Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, there is a high probability that the game ball will be placed in the first prize opening 2005. Can be accepted.

The game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2403 (not shown) and then discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The game ball discharged downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then delivered to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 passes through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the back. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been done. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to.

In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It is provided with an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of rolling the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releasing it into the game area 5a (see FIG. 139 and the like). ..

The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2530 can discharge the game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest portion on both sides of the center formed in a wavy shape.

The center accessory 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 that opens forward at the highest position of the slightly elevated part in the center of the stage 2530 and allows the game ball to enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. It is provided with a chance exit 2536 that is discharged into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when the game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides a game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located directly above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Has been done.

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly separated from the right rail 1005 on the front component 1000 so as to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls circulating on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage 2540. You will be guided by entering. As a result, when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hit) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each of the main constituent members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each of the main constituent members and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of 3031, the lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the production drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031 is provided.

Based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 3031 has a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back right movable effect unit 3400, and a back upper movable effect unit. It controls the decorative substrate, drive motor, etc. provided in the 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first large winning opening sensor 2403, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first entrance sensor 2434, and a second entrance sensor 2435. , Second start port sensor 3113, start port solenoid 2105, first attacker solenoid 2108A, second attacker solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning port sensor 3111, first start port sensor 3112, and magnetic sensor. The connection with 2404 and the vibration sensor 2405 is relayed.

The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 is a connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back lower movable effect unit 3700. Is being relayed.

The back unit 3000 is a production drive board cover attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the production drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034, respectively. 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

The back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 that is attached to the left side and the lower side of the front view at the front end of the back box 3010, and a movable back unit that is attached so as to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400, which are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, respectively, and the back right movable effect unit 3400 are attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back-up movable effect unit 3500 and a back-bottom movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. FIG. 151 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 151 (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along the VV line in (a). The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to cover the front end of the back box 3010 from the left side to the lower side in front view.

The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010, and has a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the table unit 2000, the first starting port sensor 3112 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 of the table unit 2000, A magnetic sensor 2404 capable of detecting an illegal magnetism applied from the outside and a vibration sensor 2405 are provided in the game area 5a.

The back front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110. The back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back box 3010 from the lower end of the back front left decoration unit 3120. The back front lower decoration unit 3130, which extends to the left and right along the sides of the unit base 3110 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and the back front lower decoration unit 3130, which is located at the lower part on the left side of the front view of the unit base 3110. It includes a ball guidance unit 3150 mounted on the front surface.

As shown in the figure, the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 has a translucent flat back front left decoration decoration body 3121 having a decoration of the characters "Dodododo" and a back front left decoration. A transparent, flat plate-shaped back front left light guide lens 3122 attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121, and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 are mounted. It includes a back front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 151 (b)).

The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of conical reflecting portions 3122a on the rear surface behind the "do" -shaped decoration in the back front left decorative ornament 3121. Light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3122a, and the back front left decorative decoration arranged in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. The 3121 can be light-emitting decorated in a planar shape.

The back front lower decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and the back front lower center lens 3131 and a predetermined three-dimensional decoration are formed on the front surface. The back front lower left lens 3132 and the back front lower right lens 3133, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the back front lower center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface, and the back front lower center lens 3131. , A back front lower left lens 3132, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3134 arranged on the rear side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED on the back front lower decorative substrate, the back front lower center lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be light-emitting and decorated independently of each other.

The back front lower decoration unit 3130 opens forward in the upper center of the back front lower center lens 3131, and a game ball received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and guided to the rear can enter. The central delivery port 3135 and the lower right outside of the lower front and lower central lens 3131 open toward the front, and the game ball received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backward can enter. It is equipped with a left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) after being detected by the first start port sensor 3112. The game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

The ball guidance unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be arranged below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guidance unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is open forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 in which a game ball can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 downward (above the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Movable production unit in the back]
Next, the back-middle movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back-center movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in the front view, and extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration. 3220, which is arranged on the right side of the back box and extends vertically above the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and the opening 3010a in the rear wall in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back center drive unit 3250 which is attached to both the upper and lower outer sides and moves the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction.

The back middle left decorative body 3210 is arranged on the rear side of a flat plate-shaped back middle left decorative lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a back middle left decorative lens 3211 on the front surface. The back middle left decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted (not shown) and the flat back middle left decorative lens 3211 attached to the rear side of the back middle left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the back surface of the back middle left decorative board. It is equipped with a left decorative base 3212. Although not shown, the back middle left decorative base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end, which extends left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can illuminate the back center left decorative lens 3211 by emitting the LED of the back center left decorative substrate.

The back middle right decorative body 3220 is arranged on the rear side of a flat plate-shaped back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a back middle right decorative lens 3221 on the front surface. A flat back middle right decorative substrate (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted and a flat plate-shaped back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle right decorative substrate. It is equipped with a right decorative base 3222. Although not shown, the back middle right decorative body base 3222 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end, which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed downward. The back middle right decorative body 3220 can illuminate the back middle right decorative lens 3221 by emitting the LED of the back middle right decorative substrate.

The back middle left decorative lens 3210 and the back middle right decorative lens 3221 and the back middle right decorative lens 3221 are formed in a symmetrical shape with each other, and the game board is formed substantially in the center in the vertical direction. The side of 5 near the center in the left-right direction is formed in a shape as if it were hollowed out.

The back middle drive unit 3250 has an upper rail 3251 mounted on the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and slidably supporting the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, and the back. A flat plate-shaped unit base 3252 that slidably supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, and an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252. A flat plate-shaped mounting base 3253 mounted on the lower side, a back middle drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 so that a rotating shaft protrudes between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, and a back middle The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the rack gear of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the rack gear of the back middle right decorative body 3220 mesh with each other so as to be rotatably mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 3253 and sandwiched from above and below. It is equipped with a pinion gear (not shown).

In the normal state, the back middle movable effect unit 3200 is in a state in which the left and right back middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in the most separated retracted positions from each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the back middle drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear With the rack gear, the back middle left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back middle right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, which are separated from each other, move so as to approach each other, and the movement stops immediately before they come into contact with each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located substantially in the center (appearance position) of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle left decorative body 3210. The decorations with the back middle right decoration body 3220 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) (see FIG. 189).

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front left outer side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in between.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular columnar shape, a back left rotating drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. The back left movement drive unit 3350, which is attached and moves the upper end side of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 in the left-right direction, and the back left rotation drive unit 3330, which is installed in the back box 3010, guides the lower end side of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. It includes a back left lower guide rail 3370 and a back upper left decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the back left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular columnar shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3311 on which the relief of the Nio statue is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. It includes a third decorative surface 3313 on which the decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed so as to have translucency. Although not shown, the back left decorative body 3310 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end.

The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the vertically extending movement base 3331 which is movable in the left-right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back left decoration which is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to project forward. A lower rotation base 3332 that rotatably supports the lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3331 so as to project upward from the back left decorative body 3310. With a back left rotation drive motor (heat source) (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back left decoration body 3310. , The motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and the lower end is attached to the lower rotation base 3332 while being arranged inside the back left decorative body 3310. It includes a back left decorative substrate 3334 (see FIG. 138) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

Although not shown, the moving base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that projects downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back left lower guide rail 3370.

The back left decorative substrate 3334 is arranged inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the back left decorative substrate 3334 is relatively rotatably supported on the upper end side under the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. As a result, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to be rotated by the drive of the back left rotation drive motor. The LED of the back left decorative board 3334 is always facing forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) can be luminescently decorated. it can.

The back left movement drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall inside the back box 3010, and the rotation axis protrudes rearward through the unit base 3351. The back left moving drive motor 3352 (heat source) attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotating shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 are meshed with each other. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3351, and a back left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached to the lower front part of the unit base 3351. It is provided with a slide rail (not shown) to which the moving base 3331 of the above is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

When the back left moving drive unit 3350 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back left moving drive motor 3352 via the drive gear 3353, the back left moving drive unit 3350 is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) can be moved to the right.

The back left lower guide rail 3370 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 and near the left end. The lower left guide rail 3370 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The back left lower guide rail 3370 is slidably guided in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening on the upper surface. Can be done.

The back upper left decorative body 3390 is attached to the rear side of the back upper left decorative lens 3391 having a predetermined decoration formed and the back upper left decorative lens 3391, and the unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350. It is provided with a decorative body base 3392 mounted on the front surface, and a back upper left decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the back upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can make the back upper left decorative lens 3391 emit light by emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate.

In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) is moved to the leftmost position (evacuation position) by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decoration unit 3120 so that it can be almost visually recognized from the front. Not possible (see Figure 133, etc.).

In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the back side can be moved to the right. When the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350 is reached, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display. It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600, and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

The back left movable production unit 3300 can rotate the back left decorative body 3310 around by the back left rotation drive motor (heat source) of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decorative surface 3311 and the second of the back left decorative body 3310. The rotation can be stopped so that either the decorative surface 3312 or the third decorative surface 3313 faces forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in between.

The back right movable production unit 3400 is contained in a back right decorative body 3410 formed in a triangular columnar shape, a back right rotating drive unit 3430 that rotates the back right decorative body 3410 around an vertically extending axis, and a back box 3010. The back right movement drive unit 3450, which is attached and moves the upper end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and the back right movement drive unit 3450, which is installed in the back box 3010 and guides the lower end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The back right lower guide rail 3470 and the back upper right decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a triangular columnar shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3411 on which the relief of the Nio statue is formed, a second decorative surface 3412 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3412. It includes a third decorative surface 3413 on which the decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed so as to have translucency. Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end.

The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3431 that is movable in the left-right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450 and a back right decoration that is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to project forward. A lower rotation base 3432 that rotatably supports the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3431 so as to project upward from the back right decorative body 3410. With a back right rotation drive motor (heat source) (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration body 3410. The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor, and the lower end attached to the lower rotation base 3432 while being arranged inside the back right decorative body 3410, and the front surface. The back right decorative substrate 3434 (see FIG. 138) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided.

Although not shown, the moving base 3431 is provided with rack gears extending to the left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion that projects downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back right lower guide rail 3470.

The back right decorative substrate 3434 is arranged inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the back right decorative substrate 3434 is relatively rotatably supported on the upper end side under the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410. As a result, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to be rotated by the drive of the back right rotation drive motor. The LED of the back right decorative board 3434 is always facing forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) can be luminescently decorated. it can.

The back right moving drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall inside the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft protrudes rearward through the unit base 3451. The back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and the drive gear 3453 mesh with each other and rotate back right. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached to the lower front of the unit base 3451. It is equipped with a slide rail (not shown) to which the 3431 is movably attached in the left-right direction.

In the back right moving drive unit 3450, when the pinion gear is rotated clockwise by the back right moving drive motor 3452 via the drive gear 3453, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The 3430 (back right ornament 3410) can be moved to the left.

The back right lower guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end under the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower right guide rail 3470 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The back right lower guide rail 3470 guides the protrusions so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening on the upper surface. be able to.

The back upper right decorative body 3490 is attached to the rear side of the back upper right decorative lens 3491 having a predetermined decoration formed and the back upper right decorative lens 3491, and the unit base 3451 of the back right moving drive unit 3450. It is provided with a decorative body base 3492 mounted on the front surface, and a back upper right decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can illuminate the back upper right decorative lens 3491 by emitting the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate.

In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) is moved to the rightmost position (evacuation position) by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part of it can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (FIG. 133 and the like). reference).

In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decorative body 3410 can be moved to the right via the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450 is reached, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side side of the center accessory 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and is on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located near the right end, and the whole is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

The back-right movable production unit 3400 rotates the back-right decorative body 3410 around by the back-right rotation drive motor of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430, and the first decorative surface 3411 and the second decorative surface 3412 of the back right decorative body 3410. , And any of the third decorative surfaces 3413 can be stopped from rotating so as to face forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the overall configuration of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 177. FIG. 152 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable production knit disassembled mainly for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 shows the back-up movable production unit disassembled for each main component unit and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. The back-up movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 on the front surface of the rear wall and above the opening 3010a.

The back-up movable effect unit 3500 includes a back-up first decorative unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration and a back-up second decorative unit 3510 having a character decoration different from that of the back-up first decorative unit 3510. The 3530, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 having different character decorations from the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back upper first decorative body in the center in the longitudinal direction. The unit 3510 is mounted so as to be rotatably relative to the axis extending back and forth, and the back upper second decorative unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 extend back and forth, respectively, near both ends in the longitudinal direction. The back-up rotation base unit 3570, which is rotatably attached around the axis, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570, and the back-up first decorative unit 3510 are non-rotatably attached. The back-up first decorative body unit 3510 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are raised and lowered, and the back-up elevating unit 3600 is mounted inside the back box 3010.

[5-9f-1. Back top first decorative unit]
Next, the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper first decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600.

The first decorative body unit 3510 on the back has a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the first fixed decorative lens 3513, which is arranged behind the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and has a predetermined decoration, and has translucency, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513. It is attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back upper first decorative substrate 3514. It is provided with a flat first decorative body base 3515. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

The first decorative unit 3510 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the first decorative base 3515, and the left end is on the left outer side of the first decorative base 3515 and behind the first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a attached to the side and extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b penetrating back and forth and extending to the left and right under the rack gear 3516a, and a slit of the first lower arm 3516. It is provided with a lower arm retainer 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through 3516b and which is attached to the first lower arm 3516 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. ing.

The first decorative unit 3510 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear side of the first decorative base 3515, and the right end is on the right outer side of the first decorative base 3515 and behind the first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a attached to the side and extending to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3518a and extending to the left and right, and a slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518. The upper arm retainer 3519, which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the first decorative body base 3515 and which attaches the first upper arm 3518 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515, is provided. There is.

Further, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 is provided on the rear surface of a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a and a transmission gear portion 3520a that mesh with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b that is integrally formed, and includes a first opening / closing gear member 3520 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515.

The first decorative body unit 3510 on the back side is flat on the left side of the front view of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and extends in the vertical direction, and the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is on the right side. A first having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3521a that meshes with the driving gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a columnar shape, and a slit 3521c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. It is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521, and the first opening / closing arm 3521 can be slid vertically in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. It is equipped with an opening / closing arm retainer 3522 attached to the above.

Further, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 has the left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative base 3515 and the right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, so that the first upper arm 3518 is viewed from the front left. The first opening / closing spring 3523 that is urged to move in the direction and the first mounting base 3524 that is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. The horizontal lock hole 3525a, which is mounted on the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and is open on the outer peripheral surface on the right side, is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a in the front-rear direction, and is formed on the lower outer peripheral surface. It has a vertical lock hole 3525b that is open to the rear and a mounting shaft portion 3525c that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the vertical lock hole 3525b, and the rear end of the mounting shaft portion 3525c is in the back-up elevating unit 3600. It includes a first mounting shaft member 3525 that is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up first decorative unit 3510 will be described in detail. In the back-up first decorative body unit 3510, between the closed position where the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in close contact with each other and the open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the first upper arm 3518 to which the first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is arranged above the first lower arm 3516 to which the first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with rack gears 3516a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with rack gears 3518a extending to the left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively. doing. As a result, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration are passed through the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. The lens 3512 can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of the closed position), and when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

In the back-up first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and a drive rack gear that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. The first opening / closing arm 3521 having the 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is arranged on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in the front view, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward and the first When the opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, it slides upward.

In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are brought into contact with each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has the first opening / closing spring 3523 for urging the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not (in the normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration It is in a closed position where the lens 3512 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a in the first lower arm 3516, and also near the right end of the rack gear 3518a in the first upper arm 3518. It is in mesh. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3521a in the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 158 (a)).

When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in a direction away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 158 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening and closing arm 3521. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3517, the upper arm retainer 3519, and the open / close arm retainer 3522.

Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is located in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other and first from between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

The back-up first decorative body unit 3510 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up first decorative substrate 3514 to make the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513. , Can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, when the LED of the first decorative substrate 3514 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the first fixed decorative lens 3513. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 is made to emit light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable are movable. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from the decorative lens 3512 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-2. Back top second decorative unit]
Next, the back-up second decorative body unit 3530 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is in the front-rear direction near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 (near the right end in the horizontal position). It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to.

The second decorative body unit 3530 on the back has a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the second fixed decorative lens 3533 which is arranged behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration and has translucency, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533. It is attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back upper second decorative substrate 3534. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped second decorative base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

The second decorative unit 3530 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, and the left end is on the left outer side of the second decorative base 3535 and behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531. A second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a attached to the side and extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating back and forth and extending to the left and right under the rack gear 3536a, and a slit of the second lower arm 3536. It is provided with a lower arm retainer 3537 which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative base 3535 through 3536b and which is attached to the second lower arm 3536 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative base 3535. ing.

The second decorative unit 3530 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, and the right end is on the right outer side of the second decorative base 3535 and behind the second right movable decorative lens 3532. A second upper arm 3538 that is attached to the side and has a rack gear 3538a that extends to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right on the upper side of the rack gear 3538a, and a slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538. The upper arm retainer 3539, which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the second decorative body base 3535 and which attaches the second upper arm 3538 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535, is provided. There is.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is attached to the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a and the transmission gear portion 3540a that mesh with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3540b that is integrally formed, and includes a second opening / closing gear member 3540 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535.

The second decorative body unit 3530 on the back side is flat on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and extends in the vertical direction, and the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is on the right side. It has a vertically extending drive rack gear 3541a that meshes with the driving gear portion 3540b, a receiving boss 3541b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the rear surface in a columnar shape, and a slit 3541c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. It is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the second opening / closing arm 3541 and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541, and cooperates with the second decorative body base 3535 to move the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an open / close arm retainer 3542 that is slidably attached.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 has the left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and the right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 is viewed from the front right. The second opening / closing spring 3543 that is urged to move toward the second opening / closing gear 3544 and the second mounting base 3544 that is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And have. The second mounting base 3544 is mounted on the second drive link gear member 3573 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, which will be described later.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 will be described in detail. In the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in close contact with each other and between the closed position and the open position separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second upper arm 3538 to which the second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is arranged above the second lower arm 3536 to which the second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 is provided with rack gears 3536a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the second upper arm 3538 is provided with rack gears 3538a extending to the left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 face each other. Between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, respectively. doing. As a result, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration are passed through the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. The lens 3532 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (direction in the closed position), and when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in a direction away from each other (direction of the open position).

In the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and a drive rack gear that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. It is provided with a second opening / closing arm 3541 having 3541a. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is arranged on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 in the front view, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward and the second When the opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, it slides upward.

In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and becomes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are brought into contact with each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper second decorative unit 3530 has a second opening / closing spring 3543 that urges the second lower arm 3536 to move to the right, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not (in the normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration are used. The lens 3532 is in a closed position where it is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second open / close gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and with the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. It is in mesh. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3541a in the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 162 (a)).

When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in a direction away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 162 (b)). The slide stop at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening and closing arm 3541. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3537, the upper arm retainer 3539, and the open / close arm retainer 3542.

Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Is located in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 make a predetermined character. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other and are second from between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

The back-up second decorative body unit 3530 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up second decorative substrate 3534 to make the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533. , Can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the second decorative substrate 3534 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable are movable. Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the decorative lens 3532 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-3. Back top third ornament unit]
Next, the back-up third decorative body unit 3550 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 163 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 166 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 166 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up third decorative unit 3550 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is near the end (horizontal position) opposite to the back-up second decorative unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base unit 3570. (Near the left end at the time of), it is rotatably attached around the axis extending in the front-back direction.

The third decorative body unit 3550 on the back has a third left movable decorative lens 3551, a third right movable decorative lens 3552, and a third right movable decorative lens 3552, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the third fixed decorative lens 3553, which is arranged behind the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and has a predetermined decoration and has translucency, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. It is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear surface of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back upper third decorative substrate 3554. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped third decorative base 3555. The third fixed decorative lens 3553 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

The back upper third decorative unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the third decorative base 3555, and the left end is on the left outer side of the third decorative base 3555 and behind the third left movable decorative lens 3551. A slit of the third lower arm 3556 and a third lower arm 3556 which are attached to the side and have a rack gear 3556a extending to the left and right on the upper side and a slit 3556b which penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right under the rack gear 3556a. It is provided with a lower arm retainer 3557 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through 3556b and which attaches the third lower arm 3556 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. ing.

The back upper third decorative unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear side of the third decorative base 3555, and the right end is on the right outer side of the third decorative base 3555 and behind the third right movable decorative lens 3552. A third upper arm 3558 which is attached to the side and has a rack gear 3558a extending to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3558b which penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the upper side of the rack gear 3558a, and a slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558. The upper arm retainer 3559, which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the third decorative body base 3555 and which attaches the third upper arm 3558 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555, is provided. There is.

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is attached to the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a and the transmission gear portion 3560a that mesh with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b that is integrally formed, and includes a third opening / closing gear member 3560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555.

The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is flat and extends in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is on the right side. A third opening / closing arm 3651 having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3651a that meshes with the drive gear portion 3560b, a slit 3561c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side, and a third opening / closing arm 3651c. It is provided with an opening / closing arm retainer 3562 which is attached to the rear side of the decorative body base 3555 and which is attached to the third opening / closing arm 3651 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555.

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative base 3555, so that the third lower arm 3556 is viewed from the front right. The third opening / closing spring 3563 that is urged to move toward the third mounting base 3564 and the third mounting base 3564 that is mounted on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And have. The third mounting base 3564 is mounted on the third drive link gear member 3578 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, which will be described later.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up third decorative unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back-up third decorative unit 3550 is formed between a closed position in which the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in close contact with each other and an open position in which they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third upper arm 3558 to which the third right movable decorative lens 3552 is attached is arranged above the third lower arm 3556 to which the third left movable decorative lens 3551 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with rack gears 3556a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with rack gears 3558a extending left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 face each other. Between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, respectively. doing. As a result, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration are passed through the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. The lens 3552 can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of the closed position), and when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in a direction away from each other (direction of the open position).

In the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and a drive rack gear that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. It is provided with a third opening / closing arm 3651 having a 3651a. Since the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3651 is arranged on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 in the front view, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward and the third When the opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, it slides upward.

In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are brought into contact with each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper third decorative unit 3550 has a third opening / closing spring 3563 for urging the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3651. When not (in the normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration are used. The lens 3552 is in a closed position where it is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556, and also near the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. It is in mesh. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3651a in the third opening / closing arm 3651 (see FIG. 166 (a)).

When the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in a direction away from each other via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 166 (b)). The slide stop at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole at at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3651c of the third opening and closing arm 3651. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3557, the upper arm retainer 3559, and the open / close arm retainer 3562.

Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third is between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 is visible.

The back-up third decorative body unit 3550 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up third decorative substrate 3554 to make the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. , Can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, when the LED of the third decorative substrate 3554 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable are movable. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the decorative lens 3552 and the decorative lens 3552 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-4. Backside rotation base unit]
Next, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171. FIG. 167 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view showing the gear configuration of the back-up rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 171 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and FIG. 171 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the non-action position from the front.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable production unit 3500 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit in the back-up elevating unit around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is back-up at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The second decorative unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating back and forth in the center of the longitudinal direction and front and rear near both ends in the longitudinal direction. A mounting cylinder that rotatably attaches to the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, which protrudes rearward from the outer circumference of the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c, and the first hole 3571a. It has a backside rotating base with 3571d. The first hole 3571a (inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed to have a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 to pass through. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed to be slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed in the vicinity of the right end and the vicinity of the left end, respectively, in the front view when the back-up rotation base 3571 is in a horizontally extended state (when in the horizontal position). In the following, a state in which the back-up rotation base 3571 extends horizontally will be described.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear side of the back-up rotation base 3571 and includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 extending concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a in a semicircular shape. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is formed in the form of the upper half with respect to the annulus in which the central axis is extended back and forth, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is mounted so as to form a gap with the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside elevating unit 3600, which will be described later.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is formed concentrically and fan-shaped from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3573a and the shaft portion 3573a that are rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571. It has a second link gear portion 3573b, and has a second drive link gear member 3573 to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rotation base 3571. It is attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side, and includes a pressing member 3574 having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. The second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. The second drive link gear member 3573 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the second hole 3571b by attaching a pressing member 3574 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b. It can be mounted rotatably in the state.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view of the second hole 3571b, and is the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The spur gear-shaped first link gear 3575 for the second gear that meshes with the 3573b and the first link gear for the second gear 3575 are rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view. The spur gear-shaped second link gear 3576 that meshes with the first link gear 3575 for the second and the second link gear 3576 for the second can rotate to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second link gear 3577, which is attached to the second link gear 3576 and meshes with the second link gear 3576.

The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 are meshed with each other through an opening formed in the back-up rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second third link gear 3577 is close to the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back-up rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, which will be described later.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is formed concentrically and fan-shaped from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3578a and the shaft portion 3578a that are rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571. It has a third link gear portion 3578b, and a third drive link gear member 3578 to which the rear surface of the third mounting base 3564 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rotation base 3571. It is attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side, and includes a pressing member 3579 having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. The third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the third hole 3571c by attaching a pressing member 3579 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c. It can be mounted rotatably in the state.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view of the third hole 3571c, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. The spur gear-shaped first link gear 3580 for the third gear and the first link gear 3580 for the third gear are rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. The spur gear-shaped second link gear 3581 for the third gear that meshes with the first link gear 3580 for the third gear and the second link gear for the third gear 3581 can be rotated to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third link gear 3582, which is attached and meshes with the third link gear 3581.

The third link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 are meshed with each other through an opening formed in the back-up rotation base 3571. The right end side of the third link gear 3582 for the third is close to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back-up rotation base 3571. The third link gear 3582 for the third mesh meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 described later.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear side of the lower portion between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b in the back-up rotation base 3571, and the rotation shaft penetrates the back-up rotation base 3571 and moves forward. The protruding action lever drive motor 3583 (heat source), the spur gear-shaped action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3583, and the action lever drive gear 3584 mesh with each other to rotate on the back. It has a spur gear-shaped working lever pinion gear 3585 rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a that meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends to the left and right. The action lever 3586 that is slidably attached to the front of the upper rotation base 3571 in the left-right direction, and the action lever retainer that is attached to the front of the back upper rotation base 3571 that restricts the forward movement of the action lever 3586. It includes 3587 and an action lever movement detection sensor 3588 that is attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 and detects the movement of the action lever 3586 in the left-right direction.

The action lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long square main body 3586b in which the action lever rack gear 3586a is formed on the lower side and the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends to the left of the main body 3586b in a strip shape. A slide mounting portion 3586c that is slidably mounted on the upper front surface of the back top rotation base 3571 and a first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back top first decorative unit 3510 that protrudes from the left side of the main body portion 3586b to the left. A lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, a first extension portion 3586e extending downward from the main body portion 3586b, and a lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension portion 3586e. The first working portion 3586f protruding to the left, the second right extending portion 3586g connected to the vicinity of the right end of the upper side of the main body portion 3586b and extending to the right, and the second right extending portion 3586g. The second lower extension part 3586h extending downward from the right end to a position slightly higher than the first action part 3586f, and the second lower extension part 3586h extending to the left from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the second lower extension part 3586h. From the action portion 3586i, the third extension portion 3586j extending downward from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c to substantially the same height as the lower end of the first extension portion 3586e, and the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the third extension portion 3586j. It is provided with a third working portion 3586k extending to the left (see FIG. 171).

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the action lever drive gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585, and the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571. To cover the front side of the back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 and the back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590, which are attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a and detect the rotation position of the back-up rotation base unit 3570. The back-up rotation base relay board 3591 attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the board cover 3592 attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back-up rotation base relay board 3591. And have.

The back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up rotation base unit 3600. Is. The back-up rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back-up rotation drive motor 3612 (heat source) of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600, a back-up second decorative board 3534, a back-up third decorative board 3554, and an action lever drive. It relays the connection with the motor 3583, the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is a back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the first link gear 3575 for the second, the second link gear 3576 for the second, and the third link gear 3577 for the second. It is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the second link gear 3581 for the third, and the third link gear 3582 for the third. It is provided with a rear left gear cover 3594 and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the action lever drive motor 3583.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the mounting cylinder portion 3571d protruding rearward of the back-up rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. As a result, it is attached so as to rotate around an axis extending back and forth on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610. The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back-up first decorative unit 3510 which penetrates the mounting cylinder 3571d from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit. Will be done. The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the back-up second decorative unit 3530. By attaching the rear surface of the base 3544, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotating base 3571. Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is placed on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571, in the back-up third decorative unit 3550. (Iii) By mounting the rear surface of the mounting base 3564, the back-up third decorative unit 3550 can be mounted so as to be rotatable relative to the back-top rotating base 3571.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600, and the rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 182). When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by the drive of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the first hole 3571a (mounting cylinder portion) via the rotation base driven gear 3772. It rotates around an axis extending back and forth around the axis of 3571d). The back-up rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position extending horizontally in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) and a vertical position extending vertically. Can be rotated 90 degrees between. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position about the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 move to the movable side unit 3610. It moves so as to revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are meshed with the central link gear 3611b, when they revolve around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link is linked. The gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 for the third use rotate respectively, and each rotates relative to the back-up rotation base 3571.

When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is changed from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second second link gear 3576. It is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the first link gear 3575, the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the direction opposite to the second third link gear 3757, and the third third link From the gear 3582, it is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b via the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is the third third. It rotates in the direction opposite to that of the three-link gear 3582.

At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b The angle and the rotation angle of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the back-up rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move back and forth. It revolves around the central link gear 3611b without rotating around the extended shaft. That is, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 has the first hole 3571a (movable side) in a state where the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in a constant vertical direction. It can revolve around the central link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 can move the action lever 3586 to the left via the action lever rack gear 3586a when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the action lever drive motor 3583. When the acting lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction, the acting lever 3586 can be moved to the right via the acting lever rack gear 3586a.

More specifically, the action lever 3586 is assembled on the back-up rotation base unit 3570, and the main body portion 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back-up rotation base 3571 in front view. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends to the left to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first working portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extending portion 3586g extends above the second hole 3571b to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h extends so as to be located below the second hole 3571b. The second working portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower part of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extending portion 3586j extends below the third hole 3571c. Therefore, the third working portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), this action lever 3586, in the state of being moved to the leftmost position (state of action position), is a lock piece 3586d protruding from the left side of the main body 3586b to the left in front view. However, it is in a state of protruding into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second working portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the acting lever 3586 is detected by the acting lever movement detection sensor 3588.

On the other hand, in the state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost position (the state in the non-action position), the lock piece 3586d and the first action portion 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second working portion 3586i is located slightly to the left of the center of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

The action lever 3586 will be described in detail later, but the lock piece 3586d is moved to the action position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back-up first decorative unit 3510. By doing so, it is possible to regulate (lock) the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. Therefore, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the non-action position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates backward with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the backside elevating unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

In the action lever 3586, the left ends of the first action section 3586f, the second action section 3586i, and the third action section 3586k are the first opening / closing arm 3521 and the back top first of the back-up first decorative unit 3510. (Ii) The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3651 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in a vertically extended state, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3541 are opened and closed. The arm 3651 can be slid upwards.

[5-9f-5. Back-up lifting unit]
Next, the back-up elevating unit 3600 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 177. FIG. 172 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 173 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 173 (b) shows the back-up elevating unit as a movable side unit and a fixed side unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into. FIG. 174 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed-side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed-side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 177 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position from the front, and FIG. 177 (b) is the driving when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the descending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the system from the front.

The back upper elevating unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 on the upper side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back-up elevating unit 3600 includes a movable side unit 3610 to which the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are mounted on the front surface, and a fixed-side unit to which the movable side unit 3610 is raised and lowered and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3650.

First, as shown in FIG. 174, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is attached to a substantially square movable side base 3611 extending to the left and right in front view and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. The back-up rotary drive motor 3612 in which the cage rotary shaft penetrates the movable base 3611 and protrudes rearward, the rotary drive gear 3613 attached to the rotary shaft of the back-up rotary drive motor 3612, and the rotary drive gear 3613. It is provided with a rotary base drive gear 3614 which is meshed with the rotary base driven gear 357 of the back-up rotary base unit 3570 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611.

The movable side unit 3610 has a motor cover 3615 attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 so as to cover the back-up rotary drive motor 3612, and a flat plate-shaped base cover 3616 attached to the rear side of the movable side base 3611. And a movable side relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616.

The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the axle tube portion 3611a protruding forward from the lower part in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface in a cylindrical shape, and rotates on the back side. The central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and the central link gear 3611b at the upper part, which penetrates back and forth at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right. Rotation detection piece 3611d (rotation detection piece 3611d) which is attached to the lower side of the barrel portion 3611a on the front surface and is detected by the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the backside rotation base unit 3570. (See FIG. 177).

The inner diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back top rotation base 3571 in the back top rotation base unit 3570, and the mounting cylinder portion 3571d is rotated. It can be inserted as much as possible. The central link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570. Are formed at the same pitch.

The movable side relay board 3617 includes a back upper relay board 3569 of the fixed side unit 3650, a back upper first decorative board 3514 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and a back upper rotation base relay board 3591 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570. , And the connection with the backside rotary drive motor 3612 is relayed. The elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650 are attached to the left and right ends of the base cover 3616 on the rear surface. The lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3616.

As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the fixed-side unit 3650 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 has a substantially square fixed-side base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending to the left and right in front view, and a fixed-side base 3651. In the movable side unit 3610, the spur gear-shaped elevating gear portion 3652a and the elevating gear portion 3652a, which are rotatably attached around the axis extending in the front-rear direction at the center of the front surface, project forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface. An elevating rotating body 3652 having an elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611 and a detection piece 3652c extending outward from the elevating gear portion 3652a. The elevating drive gear 3653 that meshes with the elevating gear portion 3652a of the elevating rotating body 3652 and the elevating drive gear 3653 are attached to the rotating shaft and are attached to the rear surface of the fixed side base 3651. ) And.

The fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 and is attached to the elevating detection sensor 3655 that detects the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 and the front surface of the fixed side base 3651. A pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted up and down, and a pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted up and down, and upper ends on both left and right ends at the lower part of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 outside the pair of elevating slide rails 3656. It is provided with a pair of elevating springs 3657 whose lower end side is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 and which is urged so that the movable side base 3611 moves upward.

Further, the fixed side unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a that penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular shape through which the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, and is a pair of elevating slide rails. A fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the elevating rotating body 3652 between 3656 and a fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the rear surface of the fixed-side base 3651 to cover the movable side unit 3610. The rear side of the back upper relay board 3569 and the back upper relay board 3569 that connect the movable side relay board 3617, the back upper elevating drive motor 3654 (heat source), the elevating detection sensor 3655, and the lower right relay board 3034. It includes a board cover 3660, which is attached to the rear side of the fixed side base 3651 so as to cover it.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up elevating unit 3600 will be described. In the back-up lifting unit 3600, the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable-side base 3611 in the movable-side unit 3610. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the movable side base 3611 through the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back upper rotating base 3571. As a result, the movable side unit 3610 rotatably attaches the back-up rotation base unit 3570 around the shaft extending forward and backward around the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state where it cannot move forward. be able to.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable-side base 3611 of the movable-side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is in a state of meshing with the rotation base driven gear 357 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the drive of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the axle tube portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be made to. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between the horizontally extended horizontal position state and the vertically extended vertical position state. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back top rotation base unit 3570 when the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. ..

In the assembled state of the back-up elevating unit 3600, the movable side unit 3610 can be moved (elevated) only in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed side unit 3650 by a pair of elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650. .. In the movable side unit 3610, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the fixed side unit 3650 is slidably inserted in the elevating slit 3611c of the movable side base 3611 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable side unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the elevating drive pin 3652b in the elevating rotating body 3652. The movable side unit 3610 is urged to move upward by a pair of elevating springs 3657.

In the back-up elevating unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), in the normal state, the elevating drive pin 3652b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating rotating body 3652 is directly above the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable side unit 3610 is located at the uppermost position by the elevating drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3655. In this state, the elevating drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end in the elevating slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610.

Therefore, the weight on the movable side unit 3610 acts on the elevating drive pin 3652b, so that even if the elevating rotating body 3652 tries to rotate in the front view clockwise direction via the elevating drive pin 3652b, the elevating drive pin 3652b Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotating body 3652 cannot rotate in the front clockwise direction any more, and the movable side unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable side unit 3610 is in a locked state at the raised position. As a result, the weight (load) from the movable side unit 3610 side does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 via the elevating gear portion 3652a and the elevating drive gear 3653 of the elevating rotating body 3652, and the back side. The upper elevating drive motor 3654 is not loaded.

From this ascending position, when the elevating rotating body 3652 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 moves to the left. It revolves so as to move downward, and while the elevating drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c, the movable side unit 3610 acts as an urging force for the pair of elevating springs 3657 via the elevating slit 3611c. It will move downward against it. When the elevating drive pin 3652b, which revolves when the elevating rotating body 3652 rotates counterclockwise, revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the elevating drive pin 3652b is in the left-right direction. The direction of movement is changed, and the vehicle moves downward while moving to the right, and slides to the right in the elevating slit 3611c.

When the elevating drive pin 3652b is located directly below the center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the rotation of the elevating rotating body 3652 stops, and at the same time, the downward movement of the movable side unit 3610 stops, and the movable side unit 3610 is the most. It will be in the lowered position (see FIG. 177 (b)). When moving the movable side unit 3610 from the descending position to the ascending position, the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to the above to rotate the elevating rotating body 3652 in the front view clockwise direction. Then, it can be returned to the ascending position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable side unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load applied to the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

As described above, the back-up elevating unit 3600 has the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved (up and down) up and down between the ascending position and the descending position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 178 to 183. FIG. 178 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 179 is a movable back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the side unit is a descending position. FIG. 180 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the action position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in a non-acting position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position. FIG. 182 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit, and FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the back-up rotation base unit. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position.

FIG. 185 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the non-acting position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 186 is the back-up movable effect unit. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever regulates rotation at the action position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position. FIG. 183 is the movable side in the back-up movable effect unit. When the unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, the action lever acts on the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit in the working position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is.

In the normal state, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is in the state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the most raised position as shown in FIG. 178 and the like, and the back-up rotation base unit. The 3570 is in a horizontally extended horizontal position. In this state, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are lined up on both the left and right sides, with the back-up first decorative unit 3510 at the center. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 have the urging forces of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, respectively. As a result, they are in a closed position where they are in contact with each other.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 178, the revolving elevating drive pin 3652b of the fixed side unit 3650 in the back-up elevating unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652. Therefore, it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611. As a result, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up are connected to the elevating drive pin 3652b via the elevating slit 3611c of the movable side unit 3610. Even if the weight (load) of the rotating base unit 3570 and the movable side unit 3610 acts, the elevating drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further in the front view clockwise direction, and moves downward of the movable side unit 3610. The movement of the clock is restricted, and it is locked in the ascending position.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the loads of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are applied. , The back-up lift drive motor 3654 does not act, and the back-up lift drive motor 3654 is not loaded. In a normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 that revolves the elevating drive pin 3652b is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3655.

From this normal state, when the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is driven to revolve the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the elevating drive pin 3652b moves into the elevating slit 3611c. The movable side unit 3610 moves downward as the elevating drive pin 3652b descends, and when the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position, the revolution of the elevating drive pin 3652b stops. Then, the movable side unit 3610 is positioned in the lowered position (see FIG. 179).

The back-up movable production unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 to the lowering position, so that the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decoration The body unit 3550 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned at the upper part on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 193).

When the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved between the ascending position and the descending position, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the action position. There is. When the action lever 3586 is moved to the left action position by the drive of the action lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 180, the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is the back-up first decorative unit 3510. It is in a state of being inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the above. As a result, the acting lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first mounting shaft member 3525, so that the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to which the acting lever 3586 is mounted is moved to the first mounting shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft cylinder portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

Since the tip of the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is formed in a tapered shape, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 is formed even if the backside rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced from the horizontal position. By inserting it into the 3525a, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position to lock the rotation.

In this action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extending portion 3586g of the action lever 3586 comes into contact with the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extension portion 3586j (left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative unit 3550 from the right side. As a result, the action lever 3586 rotates the back-up rotation base 3571 around the axis around the second hole 3571b in the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up rotation in the back-up third decorative unit 3550. The rotation of the base 3571 around the axis around the third hole 3571c is prevented. Therefore, by moving (elevating) the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved. Even if vibration acts, the action lever 3586 located at the action position prevents the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 from shaking. ing.

The back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are moved through the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the action lever drive motor 3583 via the action lever drive gear 3584 while being positioned in the lowered position, it meshes with the action lever pinion gear 3585. The action lever rack gear 3586a moves the action lever 3586 in the horizontal state to the right non-action position, and the lock piece 3586d is pulled out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 181). As a result, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to.

In the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable production unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 182, the rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610, and is used for the second time. The third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 for the third use mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

With the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 is driven to turn the rotation base drive gear 3614 counterclockwise. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the back-up rotary base unit 3570 is moved to the central link gear 3611b (first hole 3571a, mounting cylinder 3571d) via the rotary base driven gear 3772 that meshes with the rotary base drive gear 3614. ) Will rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view around the axis (see FIG. 183). At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

In the back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3577 mesh with the central link gear 3611b. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b to drive the second. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571, respectively. That is, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are rotatably attached to both ends of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the longitudinal direction. The drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 revolve in the clockwise direction around the first hole 3571a, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578. However, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571 rotate (rotate) in the counterclockwise direction, respectively.

Since the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610. The rotation angle between the back-up rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b and the rotation angle between the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. When the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated around the central link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 keep their rotation directions constant and the central link gear. It revolves around 3611b (see FIGS. 183 and 184). Since the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively, the back-up When the rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 move around the back-up first decorative unit 3510 while keeping their vertical orientations constant. It will revolve.

In this back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the back-up first. Since the back-up third decoration unit 3550 is arranged on the left side of the one-decoration unit 3510, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction to be in the vertical position, the back-up third (Ii) The decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are arranged on the lower side and the upper side of the back upper first decorative unit 3510, respectively, while keeping their vertical orientations as they are (FIG. 184). See). Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged in this order from the top. .. In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are each in the closed position and centered in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. It is located so as to traverse substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 195).

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 185, the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-action position is a lock piece. The 3586d is in a state of facing upward. In this state, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the action lever drive motor 3583, the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position. The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is in a state of being inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 186). As a result, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked in the vertical position.

In the back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, the action lever is moved upward with the action lever 3586. The tips (upper ends) of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of the 3586 are the receiving bosses of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back-up first decorative unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3651 in the back upper third decorative unit 3550, respectively, from below, and the first opening / closing The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 are moved upward.

When the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 move upward, the first left movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, which was in the closed position, respectively. 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the third left movable decoration of the back upper third decorative unit 3550. The lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other, and are in the open position (see FIG. 183).

As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration in the back upper second decorative unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the lens 3532 is in a state of being arranged in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are in the open positions, respectively, at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are located in the back front decoration unit 3100 so as to vertically traverse the frame of the accessory 2500 over substantially the entire height. They are lined up and down with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower center lens 3131 (see FIG. 196).

In order to return the back-up movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the operation opposite to the above.

The back-up movable effect unit 3500 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 of the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530. The second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are different from each other in the closed position where they are in contact with each other. The decoration of the characters can be shown, and when the back upper third decorative unit 3550, the back upper first decorative unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative unit 3530 are lined up from left to right, three characters are displayed. However, a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally, and the player can be made to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1. By setting the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are lined up from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is in a vertical writing state, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

As described above, according to the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is relative to the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550. The back upper first decorative unit 3510, the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back by the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-acting position according to the rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position). The upper third decorative unit 3550 can be given different effects of rotation lock (first action) and movement to the open position (second action) to show the player different effects, and the player can see different effects with various effects. It is possible to make the player less bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-9 g. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the under-back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 188 and the like. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the back lower movable effect unit, (b) is a rear view of the back lower movable effect unit, and (c) is a back lower movable decorative body in the back lower movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows the state which the unit was raised. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The under-back movable effect unit 3700 has a back-under movable decorative unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration and a back that is mounted in the back box 3010 and moves the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 up and down. It includes a lower drive unit 3750 and.

The under-back movable decorative unit 3710 has a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged in a row on the left and right under a roof extending to the left and right, and each gate part penetrates back and forth. A plurality of lower back door members 3712 attached to the main body 3711 and each gate part of the lower back decorative main body 3711 so as to open and close forward in a hinged manner, and a lower back door member 3712. It is attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body 3711 and extends to the left and right, and is slidably attached to the lower front of the lower back decorative base 3713. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 that hinges and rotates the lower back door member 3712 on the left side of the front view of a plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a slidable attachment in the upper front surface of the lower back decorative body base 3713. It is provided with an upper opening / closing slider 3715 for hinge-rotating the back lower door member 3712 on the right side of the front view of the two sets of the back lower door members 3712.

The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713, and the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 are slid in different directions in the left-right direction. One end side is attached to the upper end of the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end side is attached to the back lower decorative body base 3713, and each back lower door member 3712 is attached via the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715. It includes a door closing spring 3717 that urges an opening / closing rotating body 3716 so that the hinge rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 is urged so that the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

Further, the lower back decorative body unit 3710 is arranged behind the lower back decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 198) attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body 3711 and the rear side of the lower back decorative lens 3718. Wiring cable 3701 that connects the lower back decorative board 3719 with multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the cage and the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body base 3713. It is provided with an upper wiring cover 3720 which can induce the above. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the back lower decorative body base 3713 to form a downwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

The under-back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back bottom drive base 3751 having an extended link slit 3751a and the back bottom drive base 3751 are mounted so as to be movable up and down on the front surface and the back bottom decoration unit 3710 is mounted on the upper part. After the lower elevating base 3752, the pair of elevating arms 3753 that are rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the front surface of the lower back drive base 3751 and move the lower back elevating base 375 up and down, and the lower back drive base 3751 It includes an under-back drive motor 3754 mounted on the side and a plurality of transmission gears 3755 that transmit the rotation of the under-back drive motor 3754 to rotate the pair of elevating arms 3753 in different directions.

The lower end side of the lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably mounted in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751, and the upper end side is rotatably mounted on the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decorative unit 3710. It is equipped with a rod-shaped link arm 3756. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to a portion on the right side of the rear view of the rotation center of the opening / closing rotating body 3716. As a result, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the direction clockwise in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay board 3034. Below the board 3757 and the wiring cable 3701 that is attached above the backside relay board 3757 on the rear side of the backside drive base 3751 and connects the backside relay board 3757 and the backside decorative board 3719. It includes a wiring cover 3758 and. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the lower back drive base 3751 to form an upper open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guide portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

Subsequently, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the under-back movable effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b)). In this state, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotating body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the urging force of the door closing spring 3717, and the back lower decorative body main body. The doors of the plurality of gates of 3711 (lower back door member 3712) are in a closed state. In this state, it is located below the upper end of the portion forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and can hardly be seen from the front (see FIG. 133 and the like).

In this normal state, when the under-back drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of elevating arms 3753 so that the sides facing each move upward, the under-back elevating base 3752 moves upward and under the back. The lower back movable decorative unit 3710 attached to the elevating base 3752 is raised.

At this time, since the upper end side of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 in the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, the link arm 3756 rises together with the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. It slides upward (to the left in the rear view) in the link slit 3751a of the drive base 3751.

When the lower end side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a by raising the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, the link arm 3756 cannot move further upward. At this position (first rising position), the lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the movement of the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 in the vertical direction. In this state, the portions of the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration main body 3711 are located above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center accessory 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Multiple gates of state can be visually recognized (see FIG. 197).

When the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is further raised in this first elevating position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link is formed. The opening / closing rotating body 3716 attached to the upper end side of the arm 3756 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 188 (c)). When the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in the direction of opening the plurality of back lower door members 3712, and a plurality of the lower back decorative body 3711. The door of the gate (lower back door member 3712) is opened and the ascent stops. In the state where the lower back door member 3712 is in the open position (second ascending position), the lower back decorative lens 3718 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 (FIG. 198). See). In this state, the LED of the lower back decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light, so that the open gate can be made to emit light.

In the back lower movable production unit 3700, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower decorative board 3719 of the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 and the back lower relay board 3757 of the back lower drive unit 3750 has an upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guide portion 3720a that is curved between the upper side and the right side when viewed from the rear and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guide portion 3758a that is curved between the lower side and the right side when viewed from the rear and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

The wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 extends to the right in the rear view at the left end of the rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the back lower movable decorative unit 3710 side. It is attached so that the lower back drive unit 3750 side extends to the right in the rear view at the left end of the rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. As a result, in the state where the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered normal position, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extended along the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a without being extremely bent. The lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 are well connected (see FIG. 188 (b)).

On the other hand, in the state where the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the wiring cable 3701 includes the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720, the right side of the rear view (upper guide portion 3720a), and the lower wiring. The lower back decorative substrate 3719 and the lower back relay substrate 3757 are connected in a state of being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side of the rear view (lower guide portion 3758a). When the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is lowered from the raised state, it is guided to the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a, respectively, so that it bends smoothly without bending, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower wiring cover cover. It will be housed in 3758. Therefore, the lower back movable effect unit 3700 is extremely capable of raising and lowering the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 even if the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 and the lower back drive unit 3750 is repeatedly moved up and down. It is possible to prevent bending and prevent disconnection of the wiring cable 3701.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 189 to 198. FIG. 189 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. In FIG. 190, the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and the first decorative surface of each is turned forward. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of FIG. 191. FIG. 191 shows the second decorative surface of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body from the state of FIG. 190. It is a front view of the game board showing the state facing forward, and FIG. 192 shows the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 190, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 3rd decorative surface is facing forward.

FIG. 193 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit in the back upper movable effect unit. (2) With the right movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative unit unit in the closed positions, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd decorative body unit and the 3rd decorative body unit on the back are moved to the descending position while keeping the horizontal position on the back upper rotation base unit so that the 3rd decorative unit is arranged horizontally. FIG. 194 shows the back-up rotation base unit rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 193 to form the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit. Is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the above-mentioned ones are arranged diagonally, and FIG. 195 shows the back-up rotation base unit further rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 1st decorative body unit, the 2nd decorative body unit on the back side, and the 3rd decorative body unit on the back side arranged vertically, and FIG. 196 is a front view of the game board from the state of FIG. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the first of the back upper third decorative body unit. A game board showing the three left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens in the open position, respectively, with the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens visible. It is a front view of.

FIG. 197 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower movable decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. 198 is a front view of the back lower movable decoration unit from the state of FIG. 197. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the body unit is further raised and moved to the second ascending position.

In a normal state, the game board 5 is a display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. 133 and 140. Can be clearly seen from the player side (front). In the back-middle movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back-middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back-middle-right decorative body 3220 are located at the most distant retracted positions behind the back-left decorative body 3310 and the back-right decorative body 3410 in the evacuation position. It is in a state, and a part of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 can be slightly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the back left movable production unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the state of the retracted position moved to the leftmost side, and is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable production unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in the state of the retracted position moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. There is.

In the normal state, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the most raised position, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position extended horizontally. It is in the state of. With the back upper first decorative unit 3510 in the center, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 have the urging forces of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, respectively. Each of them is in a closed position where they are in contact with each other, and each forms a predetermined character decoration. The back-up movable production unit 3500 is such that the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown horizontally by one character, and the predetermined logo is displayed on the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500 above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is visible from the player side (front).

The game board 5 is a back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, and back bottom movable production unit 3700 perform predetermined effects (movable production and light emission production). Do.

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back-middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back-middle left decorative body 3210 and the back-middle right decoration that are separated from each other to the left and right by the drive of the back-middle drive motor 3254. The body 3220 and the body 3220 are moved so as to be close to each other and moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 189). As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located substantially in the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3210 are located. The decoration with 3220 is combined. In the state of this appearance position, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 block the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it can be combined to form one big decoration (decoration that imitates the petals of cherry blossoms), which makes the player think that there is something good and expects the game. It can be raised.

As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right movement drive By driving the motor 3452, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance positions on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state closer to the center closer to the left side side and the right side side in the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. In other words, it is located near both left and right ends on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be seen, which can surprise the player and attract the player's attention to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be made to. At this time, by emitting the LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3334 and the back right decorative substrate 3434, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be made to emit light, which further attracts the interest of the player. Can be made to. In this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, it is possible to enjoy the effect collaborated with the effect image.

With the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance position, the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430 are not shown in the back left rotation drive motor (heat source) and the back right rotation drive. The player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically by the motor (heat source). When stopping the rotating back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410, the first decorative surfaces 3311 and 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( (See FIG. 190), the second decorative surfaces 3312, 3412 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 191), and the third decorative surfaces 3313, 3413 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 192). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 is stopped, the player can enjoy the changing decoration, and the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body can be decorated with the desired decoration. It is possible to make the player feel excited depending on whether or not the body 3410 stops, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Since the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 can be moved independently, only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right can be moved. When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surfaces facing forward may be different. As a result, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

As an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the state of the normal position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 is in the action position. When the elevating drive pin 3652b is revolved in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the upper elevating drive motor 3654, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward along with the revolving of the elevating drive pin 3652b and is attached to the movable side unit 3610. The back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are lowered. When the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and the revolution stops, the back upper first decorative unit 3510, the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back upper third decoration via the movable side unit 3610. The body unit 3550 will be positioned side by side (horizontally) in the descending position (see FIG. 193).

In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are located upward from the center in the vertical direction within the frame of the center accessory 2500. , The upper half of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, a predetermined logo formed by the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Since it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the displayed production image, it can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the player's expectation for the game. Can be made to.

In the state of FIG. 193, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the action lever drive motor 3583 to move the action lever 3586 from the action position to the non-action position to the right, the first mounting is performed. The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is in a state of being pulled out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is released.

With the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 released, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, it rotates. The back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction around the central link gear 3611b via the rotation base driven gear 357 that meshes with the base drive gear 3614. At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 that mesh with the central link gear 3611b move to the central link gear. It rotates while revolving around 3611b, and their rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear. The member 3578 rotates in each of the counterclockwise directions with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in a constant vertical orientation, and the back-up first decoration is maintained. It revolves around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 194 and 195).

Due to the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 revolve around the back-up first decorative unit 3510. Since the decorative body unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in the vertical orientation, the player can sufficiently recognize the predetermined logo with the characters of the three decorations, so that the player can write horizontally. You can enjoy the movement that the logo changes to a vertical logo.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees from the horizontal position in the front-view clockwise direction, it reaches the vertical position and the rotation stops. In this state, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged in this order from top to bottom (see FIG. 195). As a result, the logo formed by the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 is placed in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since it seems to traverse almost the entire height of the inside, it can give a strong impact to the player and enhance the interest of the player.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to a vertical position, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged vertically. When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the action lever drive motor 3583 and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position is moved upward to the action position, the action lever 3586 is locked. The piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotationally locked in the vertical position.

When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action part 3586f, the second action part 3586i, and the third action part 3586k of the action lever 3586, respectively. (Upper end) is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body. The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3651 in the unit 3550 is contacted from below, respectively, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 are moved upward, respectively. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit 3530 which were in the closed position. The 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to separate from each other. Then, it is in the open position (see FIG. 196).

As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first left movable decoration facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 so as to vertically traverse the left and right centers in the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second fixed decorative lens facing between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. The 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Can be made to.

In this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134 are appropriately made to emit light, and the third By sequentially illuminating the fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131, the player's line of sight can be guided upward or downward. , Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect decorative rotating body unit 530. The left and right pachinko machines 1 are formed by the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that traverses the center of the direction (see FIG. 200).

As an effect using the under-back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 is moved to the first elevating position by the under-back drive motor 3754 from the normal state, the under-back decorative body The main body 3711 is located above the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. As a result, the lower back decorative body 3711 can be seen, which can strongly attract the interest of the player (see FIG. 197). In this first elevating position, the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 are closed by the plurality of lower back door members 3712.

When the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is slightly raised from the first elevating position to the second elevating position, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 are hinged and the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative main body 3711 are opened. (See FIG. 198). By opening the gate (back lower door member 3712), the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. In this state, if the LED of the backside decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light to decorate the opened gate, the player can be convinced that an opportunity has arrived, and the player's interest can be further enhanced. ..

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, and the back bottom movable It is possible to perform light emitting effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3700, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different embodiments in the game board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 shows an example in which, as another embodiment of the game board, the back upper movable production unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for illuminating the stage of the center accessory and the back front lower center lens of the back front decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows. In the embodiment of FIG. 199, the back-up second decorative substrate 3534 of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward. is there.

As a result, by rotating the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 becomes the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) and the back front decoration. The upper end of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is in a close state, and by emitting light of the lower LED 3534a in this state, the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the back front lower center lens 3131 can be light-emitting and decorated. .. Therefore, even in a portion where the decorative substrate equipped with the LED cannot be arranged at the rear, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to illuminate and decorate the board, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to produce light emission.

[5-12. Directed by the door frame and the game board]
Next, the effect using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202. FIG. 200 shows the back-up movable production unit in the back unit of the game board, in which the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable of the back-up first decorative body unit. The decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows the 1st fixed decorative lens, the 2nd fixed decorative lens, and the 3rd fixed decorative lens in the open position in a visible state. FIG. 201 shows a state in which the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is attached to the plate unit 320 in place of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the first decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit faces forward and the game board is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a normal state. In FIG. 201, in the state where the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit is directed forward, in the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position. In addition to the state, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back in the open position, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens are respectively placed. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where it can be seen.

First, the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 equipped with the door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 and the back-up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is vertically positioned while the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved to the descending position. By rotating the action lever 3586 from the non-action position to the action position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, and the back upper second decorative unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are each in the open position.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 200, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back are formed in substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged side by side from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. By sequentially emitting and decorating the second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 from the top, the player's line of sight can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3. It is possible to entertain the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, and to operate the operation button 410 of the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 to ensure the player participation type effect. Can be entertained.

In addition, with respect to the above-described embodiment, the plate unit 320 is provided with the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A instead of the above-mentioned effect decorative rotating body unit 530. The same effect as described above may be performed with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A facing forward. Also by this, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 in which the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B provided with the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. In this pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 201, in a normal state, in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B attached to the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side (inside) is visible from the player side (front). The first decorative surface portion 532 that is rotatable around the second axis CL2 that is orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1 has the logo decoration portion 532a having a central direction in the correct orientation.

Above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B (dish unit 320), in the game area 5a of the game board 5 which can be seen through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3, the rear side of the back unit 3000 is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the player can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side (front). In the back middle movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the left and right back middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in the state of the most separated retracted positions from each other, and pass through the frame of the center accessory 2500. A part is slightly visible. The back left decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a retracted position behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100, and is almost invisible from the front. The back right decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the retracted position, and a part of the back right decorative body 3410 is visible through the frame on the right side side of the center accessory 2500.

In the back-up movable production unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the raised position, and the back-up rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. With the body unit 3510 in the center, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are in a closed position in contact with each other, and each of them is decorated with a predetermined character (a predetermined character decoration ( The illustration is omitted). Therefore, in the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500, a predetermined logo in which three characters are arranged side by side is visible from the player side (front).

From the state shown in FIG. 201, for example, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position while the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved to the descending position. By moving the action lever 3586 from the non-action position to the action position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, and the second left movable of the back upper second decorative unit unit. The decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are in the open position, respectively.

In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 formed in substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. , It will be lined up from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated and decorated from above, so that the player's line of sight can be guided to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B in the door frame 3. .. When the light emitting decoration from above reaches the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 is light-emitting decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. At the same time, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotating body unit 530 with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward by 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 extending horizontally, and the second decorative surface portion. The 533 is oriented forward (see FIG. 202). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 at the tip of the player's line of sight guided to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B below from the game area 5a has a different decoration. Since it changes to the second decorative surface portion 533 of the above, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, raise the expectation for the game, and the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. By operating the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decline in interest.

As described above, the effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530B of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is triggered by the arrival of the light emitting decoration from above in the game area 5a to the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. It is desirable to perform, and the continuous production can be entertained by the player. In addition, the production by the decorative rotating body unit 530 is described in the above [3-4h-7. The effect described in [Movable effect in the third effect operation unit] may be executed.

As an effect different from the above, for example, from the state of FIG. 201, the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is rotated 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 to perform the second decoration. The surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward. In this state, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are used to illuminate the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 to attract the player's attention to the third effect decoration below the game area 5a. It is attracted to the rotating body unit 530B. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL so that the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward moves upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 on the opposite side of the second decorative surface portion 533 is moved. , Move it so that it appears from the bottom to the top. By switching between the second decorative surface portion 533 and the first decorative surface portion 532, the line of sight of the player can be guided above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B (inside the game area 5a).

Subsequently, with the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 in the back-up movable production unit 3500 moved to the descending position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the action lever 3586 is not released. Moving from the working position to the working position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right of the back upper second decorative unit The movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are moved to the open positions, respectively, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the first (Ii) The fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 are arranged one above the other. By illuminating them in order from the bottom, it is possible to make it appear that the effect that started from the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B has moved upward from the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. It is possible to show the player a production that can be felt, and it is possible to raise the mood of the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. The effect starting from the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B may be started when the player presses the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing at the time of executing the player participation type effect.

In this way, various effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to be released forward. When the game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 in the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the game area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so there is a high probability. It is accepted by the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first grand prize opening 2005 etc. of the state.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or , The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. may be accepted. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. To do.

When the right-handed game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port The second starting port door 2411 that closes 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball for which the "normal hit" is drawn at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. The maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. The result of the special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and " "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second jackpot (for example, per accessory)", etc. is there.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first prize opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted, by accepting the game balls in the first prize opening 2005, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. Can be done.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has been won after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the mouth 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result is "second big hit (for example, per accessory)", the second big winning opening 2006 has passed a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 3.0 seconds), or The game remains open until any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. If a game ball is accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 while the second big winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. When the game ball received in the second prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first entrance 2431 by the distribution piece 2433, the first prize opening 2005 opens and closes as a "5R jackpot", and the distribution piece 2433 makes the first. When it is distributed to the two entrances 2432, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes as a "15R big hit".

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect decorative rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 , And the lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can also entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 205. FIG. 203 is a block diagram of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the payout control board 951 and the like shown in FIG. 203. FIG. 205 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 203 and a board connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, followed by the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and finally the peripheral control board 1310.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and a main control output circuit for outputting various signals to an external board or the like. The 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a predetermined voltage power failure or a momentary power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"). I have.

The main control MPU1350a is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. The main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, and controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on.

In addition to the built-in RAM (corresponding to the above-mentioned "main control built-in RAM") and ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watch dock timer for monitoring its operation. It also has built-in functions to prevent fraud. As a part of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a random number storage area for jackpot determination, a random number storage area for special symbols, and a random number storage area for reach determination for each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area described later. , A random number 1 and 2 storage area for a variation pattern, a random number storage area for a variation type, and a start storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area described later.

Of these, the start storage information storage area includes a first start storage information storage area for the first special symbol and a second start storage information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a jackpot flag area capable of storing the value of the jackpot flag described later. As will be described later, the jackpot flag indicates not only whether it is a loss (00H) or a jackpot (01H), but also whether it is a small hit (02H).

Therefore, if the main control MPU 1310a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area that can store the value of the small hit flag, it is only a big hit or a loss. It is also possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique (world's only) code for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The main control output circuit 1310c has a reset function in which various input terminals are provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information of various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a function and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function which is not provided with the reset terminal and does not have a reset function are provided.

The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals.

On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 3112 detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, while the second start port sensor 3113 detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. The general winning opening sensor 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001. The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the general winning port sensor 3020, and the signals from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are determined by the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. It is input to the input terminal of the input port.

The gate sensor 2401 detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350. The general winning opening sensor 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2201. The first grand prize opening sensor 2403 outputs a detection signal when it detects that the game ball has been accepted by the first grand prize opening 2005. The second big winning opening sensor 2402 outputs a detection signal when it detects that the game ball has been accepted by the second big winning opening 2006. The magnetic sensor 2404 detects fraudulent activity using a magnet. The vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 caused by an external force (so-called pounding action or the like).

The detection signals from the above-mentioned distribution detection sensor 2580, gate sensor 2401, general prize opening sensor 3020, first prize opening sensor 2403, second prize opening sensor 2402, magnetic sensor 2404, and vibration sensor 2405 are respectively. , It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. The main control MPU 1310a outputs drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108A, the attacker solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, respectively.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. From 1310ca via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, The drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, so that the payout control board 951 is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Various information (game information) is output to. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, so that the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is connected to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Outputs a signal (power failure clear signal).

In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 3113, the gate sensor 2401, the first winning opening sensor 2403 and the second winning opening sensor 2402 are, for example, non-contact type electromagnetic type. Whereas the proximity switch of the above is used, for example, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020.

This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2401.

When a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the first or second big winning opening sensor 2402 Detection of game balls by 2403 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 where the game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020.

The main control MPU 1310a has no reset function by transmitting various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Send various commands as serial data to. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b receives the input terminal of the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data. When the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control with a reset function. It is output to the output circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function. No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, is used. It is connected via bus 1310ah. The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like.

When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data.

The transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of, for example, 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with BC0. With the capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a stores various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off.

When the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 952 is output from the payout control board 951 and is mainly used. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the control input circuit 1310b. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a triggered by this input.

[7-2. Payout control board]
Next, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing an example of an electrical configuration of the payout control board 951.

The payout control board 951 is a payout control that performs various controls related to payout as shown in FIG. 204, in addition to an operation switch 952 that also has various functions and an error LED display 953 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The part 954 is provided. Here, various power supplies supplied to the payout control unit 954 and the payout control board 951, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, the excitation method of the payout motor 834, the switching circuit of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834, when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. The switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 and the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 will be described.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 954 performs various controls related to payout. The payout control unit 954 inputs the payout control MPU954a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. The payout control input circuit 954b, the payout control output circuit 954c for outputting various signals to an external board, and the payout motor drive circuit 954d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It is provided with a CR unit input / output circuit 954e for exchanging various signals with a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), the payout control MPU954a has its operation (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors the system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 954b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 954b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC (hereinafter referred to as “payout control system reset IC”), which is a dedicated IC for outputting a reset signal (not shown), is not input. ing. That is, in the payout control input circuit 954b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset IC, so that various signals based on the information are output. It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

The payout control output circuit 954c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The payout control output circuit 954c has a reset function in which various input terminals are provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information of various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like. It includes a payout control output circuit 954ca with a function and a payout control output circuit 954cc without a reset function which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function.

The payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function is a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the payout control system reset described later, and the information is obtained. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals.

On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 954 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 954cc without a reset function is based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like because the payout control system reset IC does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which signals are output from the various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor (ball out switch) 827 detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the two ball guidance passages formed in the ball guidance unit. The counting switch 838 detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the payout device 830. The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827 and the counting switch 838 are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b, respectively.

The blade rotation detection switch (rotation angle switch) 840 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the figure to detect the rotation of the payout blade 834, and is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 846. Is first input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU954a via the board 847 in the prize ball case of the payout device 830 and the payout control input circuit 954b.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the control input circuit 954b.

Whether or not the full tank taxiway formed in the lower full tank path unit that guides the door frame 3 to the full tank receiver is full of game balls (the lower plate 322 is full of game balls). The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects the above is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

The payout control MPU954a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box of the game board 5 at the input terminal of the serial input port via the payout control input circuit 954b.

When the payout control MPU954a normally receives various commands from the main control board as serial data, a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function. By outputting to 954ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function to the main control board.

The payout control MPU954a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 954 kb without the reset function, thereby causing the payout control output without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit 954cc to the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

The payout control MPU954a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output with a reset function is output. While the drive signal is output from the circuit 954ca to the payout motor drive circuit 954d and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 954d to the payout motor 834, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is errored from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for display on the LED display 953 to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function to the error LED display 953.

The error LED display 953 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 953 are as follows.

For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal". When the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the main control board and the payout control board 951). doing.

For example, when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, two balls formed in the ball guidance unit 920 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827. There is no game ball in the guidance passage). For example, when the number "2" is displayed, it means "ball" (specifically, the bending passages 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 and the ball based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840). The sprocket and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance of the delivery space, which communicates with 832k, and the sprocket is difficult to rotate).

For example, when the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the counting switch 838 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838). ing. For example, when the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value).

For example, when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, it is guided to the full tank receiver 528 of the door frame 3 based on the detection signal from the full tank switch (not shown). The inside of the full tank taxiway formed in the lower full tank path unit 860 is full of game balls). For example, when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1. The fact that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the above) is notified. For example, when the number "9" is displayed, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). There is.

The payout control MPU954a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, thereby resisting from the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function. The number of actually paid out game balls and the like are output to the external terminal board 784 electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the game hall via (not shown).

The payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board to the external terminal board 784 electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown). There is. The external terminal board 784 is provided with, for example, a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC.

The external terminal board 784 transmits the number of game balls and various information (game information) to the hall computer installed in the game hall via these plurality of photocouplers. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer is configured to prevent malfunctions and failures.

The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer do not malfunction or fail due to an abnormal voltage applied from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is configured as follows. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 331 of the ball lending operation unit 330 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 333 are installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is input to a CR unit (not shown).

The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 via the CR unit input / output circuit 954e to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU954a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port. The CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334 of the ball rental operation unit 330. This signal is input to the display unit 334. A CR unit lamp (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the display unit 334 emits light when a supply voltage from the CR unit is supplied.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 can be used as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Each of the capacitors (not shown) is provided. With the capacitor for the payout control board 951, the payout control MPU954a stores various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off.

The microprocessor (hereinafter referred to as "main control MPU") mounted on the main control board 1310 by the capacitor for the main control board is a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control MPU") in which various information is built in the main control MPU even when the power is cut off. Hereinafter, it can be stored in a "main control built-in RAM"). When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to a predetermined payout control MPU954a via the payout control input circuit 954b. The payout control MPU954a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU954a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared).

This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 954 cc without the reset function, and is output to the main control board from the payout control output circuit 954 cc without the reset function. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the corresponding operation signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control board 951. , The main control MPU determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the main control MPU completely erases (clears) the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. To.

[7-2-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 951 will be described. The ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

The power supply board 931 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 931a, a power factor improving circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power supply making circuit 931d. The main power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is, for example, AC24V, and is supplied to the synchronous rectifier circuit 931a. The synchronous commutator circuit 931a rectifies the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improving circuit 931b. The power factor improving circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931c. This smoothing circuit 931c removes the ripple of + 37V supplied and smoothes + 37V and supplies it to the power supply making circuit 931d.

The power supply creation circuit 931d has DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c. "+ 24V") is created respectively.

The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and of these three types of voltages, the two types of voltages + 12V and + 24V are , Is supplied to the main control board provided on the game board 5 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 are the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, and the like. It is supplied to each.

The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit 954a to remove noise. The noise-removed + 5V is supplied to the capacitor for the payout control board 951 (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the payout control board 951, and the payout control MPU954a, It is also supplied to the payout motor drive circuit 954d and the like. The + 12V supplied to the payout control board 951 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 954b, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, and the like, and is provided on the game board 5 via the payout control board 951. It is supplied to the main control board.

The main control board provided on the game board 5 is provided with a + 5V creation circuit (not shown), and the + 5V creation circuit creates a + 12 to + 5V power supply supplied via the payout control board 951 and is not shown. Supply to the control filter circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit. The noise-removed + 5V is supplied to the capacitor for the main control board (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the main control board, and is also supplied to the main control MPU and the like. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 and the main control board provided on the game board 5 each supply a power supply of + 5 V, but in the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931 is supplied. The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d is supplied to the payout control MPU954a, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, etc. via the payout control filter circuit 954a, whereas the main control board provided on the game board 5 has In a + 5V creation circuit (not shown), a power supply of + 12V to + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is created, and + 5V created by the main control board provided on the game board 5 passes through the main control filter circuit. It is a power supply system that is supplied to the main control MPU.

[7-2-3. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, the payout motor drive circuit 954d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. The payout motor drive circuit 954d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 954da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 954da are created by the + 12V power supply line to which the + 12V DC power supply is supplied created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 and the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931. A + 5V power supply line to which a + 5V DC power supply is supplied via the payout control filter circuit 954a is electrically connected to each other, and + 12V and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is grounded to ground (GND).

A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. Will be done.

The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. It is supplied to the No. 1 terminal and the No. 10 terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834. A detailed description of the control for switching between the case where + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage and the case where + 5V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage will be described later.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively.

The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, correspond to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. doing. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive pulse which is the excitation signal is transmitted. Output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834.

This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function, and is driven from the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is output to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the ICPIC60, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834.

When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD60 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[7-2-4. Excitation method of payout motor]
Next, the excitation method of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 834, the same small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used.

In such a payout motor 834, if control is performed by a one-phase excitation method in which the coils of a small stepping motor are excited one by one, the generated torque becomes extremely small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 834 is to generate the drive torque and the static torque, the control by the two-phase excitation method is adopted in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited by two phases at a time. In this two-phase excitation method, since the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited by two phases, about twice the torque can be obtained as compared with the one-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited one phase at a time. As described above, in the present embodiment, by controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the drive torque and the static torque.

[7-2-5. Driving voltage switching circuit to the payout motor]
Next, the motor drive voltage switching circuit of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 834, the same small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. In such a payout motor 834, the output shaft can be rotated with an extremely small torque in a non-excited state, that is, in a state where no voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834.

As described above, the prize ball motor gear is fixed to the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and when the prize ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft rotates, this rotation is caused by the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the detection disk 842. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket via the prize ball sprocket gear 844. That is, in the non-excited state of the payout motor 834, when no voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834 and no current flows, the output shaft can be rotated with an extremely small torque.

Therefore, for example, the weights of a plurality of game balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box are added to the recesses of the sprocket, and this addition acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket to generate torque. This torque causes the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to rotate. In order to prevent this, a voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834 to allow a current to flow in order to obtain a static torque of the payout motor 834 even when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is not rotated. ..

In order to obtain the static torque of the payout motor 834, it is necessary to constantly apply the motor drive voltage to the predetermined phases (for example, the B phase and the A phase) to maintain the state in which the current flows. Even though the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is not rotated, in other words, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is used even though the player is not performing the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball. Power will be consumed in the same way as when rotating.

[7-2-6. Drive voltage to the payout motor when the power is turned on and off]
Next, the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, and the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI). ) Is set to output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. When it is obtained, it is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954 da to control the supply of + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

The payout control MPU954a performs a power-on processing, which is a payout control program, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, such a concept at the time of turning on the power includes, for example, in addition to the case where the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the power is supplied after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off due to a power failure. It also includes a power recovery in which the power is restored after the power is restored or the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off due to a momentary power failure.

When this power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU954a first sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to supply + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, and the voltage switching circuit 954da. It is controlled to generate a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

This means that when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout motor 834 does not forcibly supply + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, but supplies + 12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. This is because the power consumed by the motor is extremely large.

That is, in the main control board provided on the game board 5 to which the + 12V DC power supply created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is supplied, the voltage + 5V which becomes the operation control voltage of the main control MPU is changed from this + 12V to + 5V. Since it is generated in the creation circuit, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, and the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes extremely large, so that the power is + 12V. It becomes difficult for the voltage level of. Along with this, in the main control board provided on the game board 5, it becomes difficult to create + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU, from this + 12V with the + 5V creation circuit, and the main control MPU starts operating. Can be prevented from becoming impossible.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, by supplying + 5 V, which is set to a low voltage as the motor drive voltage, to the payout motor 834, the power is turned on. Even if + 5V becomes unstable, the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the payout motor 834 is not exceeded. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 834 from failing due to the unstable power supply when the power is turned on.

Subsequently, the payout control MPU954a performs an initial setting process on the drive ICPIC60. In the initial setting process for the drive ICPIC60, the initial value of the drive ICPIC60 is set. As this initial value, information for outputting a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) in order to obtain a static torque of the payout motor 834. Is set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU954a.

Subsequently, the payout control MPU954a performs a wait timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power supply becomes stable after the power is turned on, and then performs a fixed position setting process of the sprocket. In this fixed position setting process of the sprocket, it is determined whether or not the sprocket is located at the above-mentioned fixed position.

Specifically, the payout control MPU954a is not in the state where the sprocket is in the above-mentioned fixed position when the detection notch is not detected based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. In order to make a determination and switch from + 5V to + 12V as the motor drive voltage, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW to HI) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da.

The payout control MPU954a sets the information for outputting the payout motor drive signal in order to rotate the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates according to the payout motor drive signal output from this output port.

When the payout control MPU954a detects the detection notch 842b, the payout control MPU954a rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, and then outputs information to output a payout motor drive signal to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834. It is set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output port.

The payout control MPU954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, from HI to LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to switch from + 12V to + 5V as the motor drive voltage, so that the sprocket stands by at a fixed position. Maintain the state.

The payout control MPU954a is a payout control main process (a process of receiving and analyzing a command from a main control board provided on the game board 5, a process of setting a main operation related to the payout of a game ball, and an error LED display) every 2 ms. (Processing for creating display data on 953, etc.) is repeated.

The payout control MPU954a determines that the sprocket is in the above-mentioned fixed position when the detection notch 842b is being detected based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. , The fixed position setting process of the sprocket is terminated as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the payout control MPU954a shifts from the payout control main process, which is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, to the payout control power cutoff process. In the present embodiment, the concept of "power off" includes not only the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, but also the case where the power is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. In the above-mentioned payout control power cutoff process, various information related to payout is stored in the payout control built-in RAM as backup information, and + 5 V as a motor drive voltage is forcibly supplied to the payout motor 834, so that the logic of the voltage switching signal ( For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and control is performed to generate a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

As described above, the + 5V voltage is also supplied to the payout control MPU954a in addition to the voltage switching circuit 954da. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the drive system called the payout motor 834 and the payout control MPU954a The control system and the mechanism are such that they go down at the same time.

This means that when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the payout motor 834 does not forcibly supply + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, but supplies + 12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. This is because the power consumed by the motor is extremely large.

That is, in the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 to which the + 12V DC power supply created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is supplied, + 5V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU is changed from this + 12V to + 5V. Since it is created by the creation circuit, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, and the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes extremely large, resulting in + 12V. Voltage level drops sharply.

Along with this, before the main control program completes storing various information related to the game in the main control built-in RAM by performing the main control power cutoff process, the main control voltage level drops sharply and the main control is controlled. It is a mechanism that can prevent the MPU from becoming inoperable.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 forcibly supplies + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, so that the voltage is supplied to the voltage switching circuit 954da. By outputting the logic of the switching signal (for example, LOW), the control system called the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 and the drive system called the payout motor 834 are the same when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. + 5V is supplied (that is, + 5V, which is an operation control voltage, is supplied to the control system called the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 and the motor is supplied to the drive system called the payout motor 834. (By supplying + 5V as the drive voltage), the time when the control system called the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 is stopped and the time when the drive system called the payout motor 834 is stopped can be matched. As a result, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned off while the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 grasps the rotation position of the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

That is, the payout motor 834 can be under the control of the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 until just before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevent the output shaft of the payout motor 834 from rotating due to the influence of the power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[7-2-7. Timing of switching the drive voltage to the payout motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, and the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI). ) Is set to output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. When it is obtained, it is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954 da to control the supply of + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates, as described above, the prize ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket through.

On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket, as described above, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box, three recesses into which the game balls fit are equally divided at 120 degrees and the prize balls are formed. In the ball delivery space formed in the back box 832, three recesses 837b into which the game balls fit are equally divided at 120 degrees and arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box. The three recesses of the sprocket and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged so as to be displaced from each other by 60 degrees. Each time the sprocket makes one rotation, a maximum of six game balls can be sent downstream from the game balls received by the three recesses and 837b, respectively.

The game ball received by the three recesses of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box is sent out to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. The game ball received by the three recesses 837b of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 is sent out to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. To.

The payout control MPU954a is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply + 12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 to control the output of the payout motor 834. In the case where the shaft is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket to pay out the game ball, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to the recess of the sprocket, 837b. The accepted game ball is finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. After that, the payout control MPU954a takes a time (a preset time, for example, several hundreds of milliseconds) required for the game ball finally sent out to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until the elapse of (set to seconds).

When this time elapses, the payout control MPU954a stops the rotary drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and uses this as an opportunity to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example,). , In order to switch from HI to LOW), by setting the logic of this voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the control to supply a + 5V voltage as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 is controlled. By doing so, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 to maintain the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

Specifically, for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 drives the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. .. When the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings.

Start as a winning opening When a game ball is accepted in the winning opening, a command (prize ball command) for paying out only three game balls as prize balls to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 is provided on the game board 5. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the above.

The payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control to supply + 12 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket, and the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball are placed one by one in the recess of the sprocket, 837b. The received game ball is sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. After that, the payout control MPU954a takes a time (a preset time, for example, a preset time) required for the third game ball delivered last to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until a few hundred milliseconds have passed.

When this time elapses, the payout control MPU954a stops the rotary drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and uses this as an opportunity to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example,). , In order to switch from HI to LOW), by setting the logic of this voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply + 5V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. As a result, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 to maintain the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

As described above, when the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when the rotation position of the sprocket is stopped at a fixed position, the payout control board 951 pays out. After rotating the output shaft of the motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, the state in which the drive is stopped is maintained to maintain the state in which the sprocket stands by at a fixed position.

That is, when the payout control MPU954a detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when the rotation position of the sprocket is stopped at a fixed position, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is predetermined. This "predetermined rotation angle" is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to generate + 12V as the motor drive voltage. In the case where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket to pay out the game ball by controlling the supply to the payout motor 834, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to finally send the game balls received in the recesses of the sprocket, 837b, to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. After that, the payout control MPU954a takes a time (a preset time, for example, several hundreds of milliseconds) required for the game ball finally sent out to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until the elapse of (set to seconds), and when this time elapses, the rotary drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped to drive the output shaft of the payout motor 834. Stop it.

The payout control board 951 can be operated by supplying a stop voltage of + 5 V as an operation control voltage. When the payout control board 951 rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control board 951 goes to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a drive voltage of + 12 V to the payout motor 834. Outputs a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal. On the other hand, the payout control board 951 goes to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834 when obtaining a quiescent torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. Outputs a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal. The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to forcibly supply the stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834 when the power is cut off.

Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 is the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI). By setting to and outputting to the voltage switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 is set in the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to obtain a voltage. By outputting to the switching circuit 954da, it is controlled to supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

The payout control MPU954a of the payout control board 951 is used as a motor drive voltage when the power is turned off (including the case where the power is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure in addition to the case where the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off). In order to forcibly supply + 5V to the payout motor 834, the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is maintained in a stopped state. It is configured to control the generation of static torque for this purpose.

In this way, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is supplied with a driving voltage of + 12 V to the payout motor 834. In order to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball by rotationally driving, and to maintain the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834. Static torque can be obtained.

The payout control board 951 outputs a drive voltage of + 12 V when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, while the payout control board 951 outputs a drive voltage to supply the payout motor 834. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the switching circuit 954da. At the same time, the payout control board 951 controls by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited by two phases at a time. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, it is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834. A voltage switching signal is output, and the payout control board 951 is controlled by a two-phase excitation method that excites the coils of the payout motor 834 in two phases at a time.

Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU954a is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to switch the voltage. By outputting to the circuit 954da, it controls to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834. At the same time, the payout control MPU954a controls by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited by two phases at a time.

On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the payout control MPU954a is set in the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da. As a result, the motor drive voltage of + 5 V is controlled to be supplied to the payout motor 834, and the coil of the payout motor 834 is controlled by a two-phase excitation method that excites two phases at a time.

In this way, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is supplied with + 12 V as the drive voltage to the payout motor 834. In order to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball by rotationally driving, and to maintain the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834. Static torque can be obtained.

When a driving torque of + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 to rotate the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, or when a stop voltage of + 5V is supplied to the payout motor 834. Even when a static torque is obtained to maintain the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in a stopped state, the payout motor 834 is controlled by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited in two phases at a time. By doing so, for example, as compared with the one-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited one by one, the torque generated by the payout motor 834 can be increased, so that the drive torque and the static torque are increased. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the drive torque by controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method. Therefore, for example, a plurality of game balls passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box. Even if this load acts in the direction opposite to the direction in which the sprocket is rotationally driven by the output shaft of the payout motor 834 by urging its own weight into the recess formed in the sprocket. The drive torque of the payout motor 834 is superior to the generated torque. Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor can be transmitted to the sprocket to smoothly rotate the sprocket.

By controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the static torque. Therefore, for example, the weight of a plurality of game balls passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box is reduced. By being urged by the recess formed in the sprocket, even if this load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the static torque of the payout motor 834 exceeds the torque generated by this load. Therefore, the output shaft of the payout motor can be maintained in a stopped state, and the sprocket can be maintained in a stopped state.

Therefore, a small stepping motor can be adopted as the payout motor 834. By adopting the same type of small stepping motor as the payout motor 834 that operates the movable body provided on the game board 5, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950 that controls payout by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 that pays out the game balls. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a counting switch 838 and a voltage switching circuit 954da in the payout motor drive circuit 954d.

The counting switch 838 can detect the game ball paid out by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834. The voltage switching circuit 954da is a voltage for maintaining a + 12V drive voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft of the payout motor 834 and a state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, and is compared with the drive voltage. It is possible to switch between a low voltage of + 5V and a stop voltage.

When the payout control board 951 rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control board 951 goes to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a drive voltage of + 12 V to the payout motor 834. While outputting the voltage switching signal which is the control signal, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the voltage for supplying the stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834 is obtained. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the switching circuit 954da.

Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU954a is set in the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to obtain the voltage. By outputting to the switching circuit 954da, it controls to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while payout is obtained when the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is obtained. The control MPU954a sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da, supplies a driving voltage of + 12 V to the payout motor 834, and rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to pay out the game ball. When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the payout motor 834 is driven until the time required for the last payout game ball to be detected by the counting switch 838 by rotationally driving the output shaft of the payout motor 834 has elapsed. The output shaft is continuously driven to rotate, and when this time elapses, a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, switched from the + 12V drive voltage to the + 5V stop voltage, and supplied to the payout motor 834. ..

Specifically, the payout control MPU954a is set in the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a + 12V motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, thereby supplying the payout motor 834. When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to rotate the sprocket and paying out the game ball, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven and received in the recess of the sprocket. Finally, the game ball is sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. After that, the payout control MPU954a rotates and drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 until a predetermined time required for the game ball finally sent out to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c elapses. When this time elapses, the rotary drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

With this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) in order to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), and the voltage switching circuit 954da. By controlling the supply of + 5 V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 by outputting to, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 to maintain the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

In this way, the payout control MPU954a supplies the payout motor 834 with a driving voltage of + 12 V based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da. A state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by rotating the output shaft of the 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball and supplying a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834. A static torque can be obtained to maintain.

A control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, a + 12V drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 834, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to drive the game ball. In the case of payout, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the time required for the last payout game ball to be detected by the counting switch 838 by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 has elapsed. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until this time elapses, and when this time elapses, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da for driving. The voltage is switched from + 12V to + 5V for stopping and supplied to the payout motor 834.

The payout control board 951 is housed in the payout control board box 950. When the payout control board 951 rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control board 951 goes to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a drive voltage of + 12 V to the payout motor 834. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal, the payout control board 951 outputs a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834 when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 954da.

Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU954a is set in the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to obtain the voltage. By outputting to the switching circuit 954da, it controls to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while payout is obtained when the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is obtained. The control MPU954a is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit to control the supply of + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven by supplying + 12 V as a drive voltage to the payout motor 834 based on the control signal input to the voltage switching circuit. It is possible to obtain a driving torque for paying out, and also to obtain a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of + 5 V to the payout motor 834. it can. It is also possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the game machine by adopting the same type of motor as the payout motor 834, which is the same type as the small motor for operating the movable body provided on the game board 5.

The rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted to the sprocket that pays out the game ball to the player as a prize ball, and is controlled by the payout control board 951. In the state where the control to stop the rotation of the sprocket is performed by the payout control board, the state in which the load due to the weight of the sprocket is applied to the sprocket is maintained by connecting the subsequent game balls to the game balls received by the sprocket. The Rukoto.

The payout device 830 includes at least a payout motor 834 and a sprocket. The payout motor 834 is an electric drive source, and the sprocket is capable of rotating by transmitting the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

The outer peripheral portion of the sprocket is provided with a certain number of front recesses capable of receiving one game ball passing through the bending passage forming the ball passage by a pair of bending passage walls formed in front as the ball passage. A certain number of rear recesses capable of receiving one game ball passing through the bending passage forming the ball passage are provided by a pair of bending passage walls formed behind the ball passage.

Specifically, sprockets are rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket, three recesses into which the game ball fits are equally divided at 120 degree intervals in the ball delivery space. A ball delivery space is also formed in the prize ball back box that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box, and the sprockets are rotatably arranged in this ball delivery space as well. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket, three recesses into which the game ball fits are equally divided at 120 degree intervals in the ball delivery space. That is, the three recesses of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box are arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box. It is arranged in front of the three recesses of the sprocket.

In the state where the payout motor 834 is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 951, the ball passage is provided by a pair of bent passage walls as ball passages formed in front on the ridgeline which is the boundary portion between the sprocket and the front recess. By setting the state of receiving the game ball passing through the constituent bending passage, the weight of the game ball is urged by the sprocket in one rotation direction. At the same time, on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the rear recess of the sprocket, a state in which a game ball passing through a bending passage forming a ball passage is received by a pair of bending passage walls as ball passages formed behind. By doing so, the weight of the game ball is urged by the sprocket in the other rotation direction opposite to one rotation direction.

Specifically, when the sprocket is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box, the prize ball front box is placed on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket. In addition to receiving the game ball passing through the formed bending passage, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box, the prize ball back box is on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the recess of the sprocket. It is controlled by the payout control board 951 so as to be in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage formed in.

As a result, the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box is received on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket, and the ball formed in the prize ball back box. In the delivery space, the sprocket is maintained in place by receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball back box on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket. In this state, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball front box is viewed from the front side of the sprocket with respect to the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket. Therefore, the load can be applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. On the other hand, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the sprocket on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket, and the payout device 830 is on the front side. Seen from the above, the load can be applied in the direction of rotating counterclockwise.

As described above, in the state where the payout motor 834 is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 951, the ball passage is formed forward on the ridgeline which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket and the concave portion as the front concave portion. By setting the state in which the game ball passing through the bending passage forming the ball passage is received by the pair of bending passage walls, the weight of the game ball is one rotation direction to the sprocket (clockwise when the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side). It is urged in the direction of rotation). At the same time, the game ball passing through the bending passage forming the ball passage is received by the pair of bending passage walls as the ball passage formed rearward on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket and the recess as the rear recess. By setting the state, the weight of the game ball is opposite to the one rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side) with respect to the sprocket. When viewed from the front side, it is urged in the direction of rotating counterclockwise).

As a result, the sprocket is urged by the weight of the game ball in one rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side), and the sprocket is urged in one rotation direction (the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise). By being urged in other rotation directions (direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front side) opposite to the direction in which the rotation device 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side, each other The rotations in the direction of rotation can cancel each other out.

Therefore, even if a small motor having a static torque that is extremely smaller than the static torque of the large motor is adopted as the payout motor 834, the sprocket can be used while the payout motor 834 is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 951. It can be maintained in a stopped state. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 834. It is also possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by adopting the same type of motor as the payout motor 834, which is the same as the small motor for operating the movable body provided on the gaming board 5.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout control MPU954a controls the voltage switching circuit provided in the payout motor drive circuit and the drive ICPIC to obtain, for example, the drive torque and static torque of the payout motor 834, which is a small stepping motor. Although the control for generating is performed, such a circuit and control can also be applied to a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1530, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, and a volume control volume 1510a. The peripheral control unit 1530 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310.

The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 includes a VDP 1540a. The VDP1540a controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the frame side second effect display device 460A, while controlling the sound such as BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Do.

The volume adjustment volume 1510a includes a knob portion that can be rotated, and adjusts the volume of BGM, sound effects, etc. output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 according to the rotation operation of the knob portion. (Hereinafter referred to as "hall side volume adjustment function"). The peripheral control unit 1530 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 may be separate or integrated as shown in the figure. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 can be performed by the liquid crystal and the VDP 1540a of the sound control unit 1540, or vice versa.

In the peripheral control board 1510, when the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated by the rotation operation of the knob portion, the peripheral control MPU 1530a creates the operation history information of the volume adjustment volume 1510a as the history information of the detection signal output accordingly. Then, it may be set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in association with the hall side volume adjustment function.

That is, each of the created operation history information is linked to the hall side volume adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated while each function is operating. Is written. The peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated while the hall side volume adjustment function is operating, for example, based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area (for example, whether or not there is a volume adjustment operation). Whether or not) can be grasped after the fact.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the volume adjustment volume 1510a as described above, the speaker is controlled to energize an amplifier (not shown) so that the volume is intentionally set to the board volumes 0 to 6 by the hall clerk. The output mode can be changed to a desired mode.

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function. As the player-side volume adjustment function, first, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510, which receives the operation signal of the operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, controls the speaker according to the operation content. An example of a function of changing the volume and setting the volume of the speaker to the changed volume can be exemplified.

Further, as a player-side display light amount adjusting function, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player has the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the operation content. (Or, the amount of light of the frame-side effect display device 460) may be changed, and the amount of light of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (or frame-side effect display device 460) may be used as the changed amount of light.

In addition, as a light emitting body light amount adjusting function on the player side, the peripheral control MPU1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player has an LED group (or an LED group (or) according to the operation content. The light amount of the lamp group) is changed, and the light amount of the game board side effect display device 1600 (or the frame side effect display device 460) is set as the changed light amount.

According to the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display light amount adjustment function, or the player-side luminous body light amount adjustment function as described above, the player can continue the game under the intentionally set desired environment. become able to.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1530 includes a peripheral control MPU 1530a, a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, and a peripheral control external watch dock timer 1530e. Peripheral control MPU1530a is a kind of microprocessor. The peripheral control ROM 1530b controls various control programs such as a sub-control program, various data, and a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on, and controls the effect operation. Stores various control data and various schedule data.

The peripheral control RAM 1530c has various information (for example, a game board side effect display) that is inherited across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a V blank signal from the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, which will be described later, is input. Information for managing schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the device 1600, schedule data that defines the light emitting mode of various LEDs, etc.) is stored.

The peripheral control SRAM 1530d stores various information (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, etc.) that is continued over days. The peripheral control external watch dock timer 1530e monitors whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1530a is operating normally (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control external WDT1530e”).

The peripheral control RAM 1530c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1530d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board. The stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours.

Since the power supply board is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1530e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU1530a is out of control, and when the timer is timed up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1530a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1530e to the peripheral control external WDT1530e within a certain period of time (until the timer ties up), the peripheral control MPU1530a is reset. The peripheral control MPU1530a is configured so that when a clear signal is output to the peripheral control external WDT1530e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1530e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1530a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Send to the drive board.

Peripheral control MPU1530a outputs game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5, and serial I / O for the motor drive board. It is transmitted from the port to the motor drive board via the peripheral control output circuit.

Peripheral control MPU1530a outputs door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3, and serial I for frame decorative drive amplifier substrate LED. It is transmitted from the / O port to the peripheral control output circuit. In this embodiment, the boards that perform drive control related to decoration on the frame side are collectively called "frame decoration drive amplifier board".

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1530a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). A detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the posture of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 provided on the decorative rotating body unit 530, and a pressure detection for detecting the operation of the operation button 410. The detection signal from the switch is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the door frame relay board 911 or the door frame left side decorative board 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier board as a heat source). The serialized operation unit detection data is sent from the door-side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and the serial I / for the operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU1530a. It is input to the O port.

The detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serials on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1530a via the peripheral control input circuit. .. The peripheral control MPU 1530a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1530a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1530e together. Is diagnosing.

[7-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1530a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 205, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1530ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It includes a / O port 1530ae, a WDT 1530af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1530ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1530ak.

Peripheral control CPU core 1530aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac via internal bus 1530ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1530af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1530ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak via the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1530b via the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the external bus 1530h, while internally to the peripheral control RAM 1530c and the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. Various data are read and written via the bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the external bus 1530h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, peripheral control ROM 1530b, peripheral control RAM 1530c, and peripheral control SRAM 1530d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1530af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1530ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1530af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1530ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1530ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1530ah, various serial I / O ports for peripheral control 1530ae, WDT1530af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1530ag, and Reads and outputs to an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and the peripheral bus 1530ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1530af, and peripheral control built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Peripheral in order to independently transfer data between various parallel I / O ports 1530ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without going through peripheral control CPU core 1530aa. While reading and writing to storage devices such as the control ROM 1530b, peripheral control RAM 1530c, and peripheral control SRAM 1530d via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and external bus 1530h, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae and WDT1530af with built-in peripheral control , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1530ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak, and other input / output devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and peripheral bus 1530ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1530ad controls the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral bus 1530ai, and the external bus 1530h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, the peripheral control ROM 1530b, the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1530d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae, WDT1530af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1530ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1530ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1530af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is out of control, and when this timer ties up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa resets when the watch dock timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer ties up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa starts the watch dock timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1530ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emitting latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1530e. Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1530ag provide detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown). A movable body information acquisition latch for serializing with a board-side serial transmission circuit and receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board-side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1530a. It outputs a signal or outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 3.

This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530ag are electrically directly connected to each other, and the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1530ag is shortened. Noise countermeasures can be taken for LED lighting control. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into a 1024-step value from a value to a value of 1023. .. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6.

In accordance with such a setting of the board volume, in the present embodiment, for example, as a volume adjustment function on the hall side (hereinafter referred to as "hole side volume adjustment function"), the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set so as to increase from the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume 6.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3 are BGM so that the VDP1540a of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 1540 has a volume set to the board volumes 0 to 6. And output sound effects. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion, the sound such as BGM and sound effect is output from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 3. ing.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the BGM and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a problem or fraudulent activity related to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a content related to the game production are notified. The notification sound is configured to be output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, but the notification sound and the notification sound are reproduced without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism to be done. The volume from mute to maximum volume is adjusted by the effect control program controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 1540 (VDP1540a described later).

The volume adjusted by this effect control program can be smoothly changed from mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the BGM reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 Although the effect sound such as the sound effect becomes smaller, the notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) when a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Can be output. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the notification sound output due to the occurrence of a defect or the cheating of the player.

[7-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1530b includes various control programs, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter referred to as “)” that control the peripheral control unit 1530, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, the RTC control unit 1565, and the like. (Referred to as "specified individual information") is stored in advance (effect control storage unit).

The various schedule data include schedule data for screen generation for displaying the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and light emission mode generation for controlling the light emission modes of various LEDs. There are schedule data, sound generation schedule data for reproducing BGM, sound effects, notification sounds, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for controlling the drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series.

The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which sounds such as BGM and sound effects are reproduced. In this sound command data, a channel number for instructing which channel of a plurality of channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1540a to incorporate sound data such as BGM and sound effects is defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the form in which the sound source is built in the VDP1540a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be said that the sound source may be externally attached to the VDP1540a. Not to mention.

The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is defined.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b has a brightness correction for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 1565. The program is included.

This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, and will be described later. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM which is built in the RTC control unit 1565 and receives power backup even in the event of a power failure. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information.

This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%. Includes the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. And turn on.

On the other hand, when 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness is set. When the brightness of the LED included in the information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information.

[7-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 205, the peripheral control RAM 1530c has a backup management target work area that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is a backup target, and this backup. The backup 1st area and backup 2nd area that exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the managed work area, and the copy of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b are dedicated. Various control program copy areas stored in, various control data copy areas stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, various control data copy areas that exclusively store copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc., and various controls. Of the various information updated when the program is executed, there is a backup unmanaged work area that exclusively stores the data that is not the backup target.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the work area to be backed up and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. Regarding the managed work area, the first backup area, and the second backup area, the main control board 1310 (power-on command output means) when the power supply is started by the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (when the power is turned on). The power-on command (see FIG. 207) output by is instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the operation switch 952 was operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on). (It indicates the start of the production at the time) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area provides effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal from VDP1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, which will be described later, is input. Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs, are backed up. It is provided with a Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively.

Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following 0 means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit.

The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area to the backup second area, which will be described later, have the same storage area size as the "Bank0". It means that you are doing it. As will be described later, when the VDP 1540a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the "(1fr)" is output from the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Since a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1530a, in other words, every time the V-blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control unit performs steady processing every 1 frame (1 frame). Is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the production information (1fr) and the production backup information (1fr) described later) are also added. , Used in the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) is provided with a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, a reception command storage area, an RTC information acquisition storage area, a schedule data storage area, and the like. There is. The transmission data storage area on the lamp drive board side is set with the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The data storage area for LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set, and the reception command storage area is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are set. The RTC information acquisition storage area is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 1565 (RTC built-in RAM of the RTC15654a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area is the main control board 1310 (main control). Based on the command received from MPU1310a), this is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set. In the schedule data storage area, various schedule data copied to various control data copy areas are read and set from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and various schedule data are directly read and set from the peripheral control ROM 1530b. Some are done.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area, a movable body information acquisition storage area, an operation unit information acquisition storage area, a history information storage area, and the like. It is provided.

The transmission data storage area for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor is set by the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3. The transmission data storage area on the motor drive board side is a storage area on the game board side for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT is set.

On the other hand, in the movable body information acquisition storage area, various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 is set based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. The operation unit information acquisition storage area is a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530. Various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) and the operation of the operation button 410 (for example, the operation history information of the operation button 410 created based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, etc. .) Is the storage area in which it is set.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area and motor drive The substrate-side transmission data storage area is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in a certain cycle, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed in the next cycle. When the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, and each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, The game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle, the peripheral control unit steady processing of the previous cycle is executed. At that time, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in a certain cycle, the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, and the peripheral area is in the next cycle. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area.

That is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emitting data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first region and the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage region. For example, when the door side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle, the peripheral control unit steady processing of the previous cycle When the process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, and the next When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing of the cycle is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. , Each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. To.

For example, when the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the current cycle, the previous cycle When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit of the next cycle is set. When the 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed. Each time it is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area.

Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing of this cycle, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing of the previous cycle is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area. proceed.

Next, a backup first area and a backup second area for exclusively storing a copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area, will be described.

In the backup first area and the backup second area, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms), is copied to the backup first area and the backup second area at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac. As the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the backup information to the first backup area and the second backup area at high speed. To. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair. A total of two pairs are managed as one page. There is. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs as one page. This is an area for management, and the second backup area has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs as one page. This is an area for management. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and the backup second area.

In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) for each frame (1 frame) of the peripheral control unit. Is executed at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to the backup first area and the backup second area, and the effect information is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. (1ms) is the effect backup information (1ms), and every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated, each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac is set in the backup first area and the backup second area. However, the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1530ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1530d has a backup management target work area 1530da and a backup management target work area 1530da that exclusively store the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A first backup area and a second backup area are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various stored information.

The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d are such that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including the time when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure as described above), the power on command from the main control board 1310 is sent to the RAM. Even when the clear effect start and the start of each state effect are instructed, zero clear is not performed. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area, the backup first area, and the backup second area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c are cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1530da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is provided with Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following 0 means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit.

The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area to the backup second area, which will be described later, have the same storage area size as the "Bank0". It means that you are doing it. "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively, because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is a backup target. (The effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area and a backup second area for exclusively storing a copy of the effect information (RAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1530da, will be described. The first backup area and the second backup area have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page.

The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the backup first area and the backup second area at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page, and the backup second area is Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and the backup second area.

[7-3-2. LCD and sound control unit]
The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls sounds such as BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. And do.

The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 have a built-in sound source for controlling sounds such as BGM and sound effects (hereinafter, also referred to as "built-in sound effect"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1540a that controls drawing of 460, and various character data as display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 ( A liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b that stores various sound data such as BGM and sound effects, and a relay board for the door frame that stores serialized BGM and sound effects as audio data. It includes an audio data transmission IC 1540c that transmits 911 and a decorative board 160 on the left side of the door frame (a frame decorative drive amplifier board as a heat source).

Further, the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b are size-converted to be used for displaying a common image by changing the display size in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. Image data is stored in advance.

In the peripheral control unit 1530, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

The peripheral control MPU1530a extracts the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and VDP1540a. After the output to, the peripheral control unit 1530 transfers the next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. It is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU1530a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, each time a V blank signal is input. Output to VDP1540a one by one from the first screen data.

The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set to 1530c in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The peripheral control MPU1530a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and VDP1540a. Output to.

After that, the peripheral control MPU1530a, triggered by the input of the V blank signal, transmits the next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area. It is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs necessary sound command data to the VDP1540a according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area each time a V blank signal is input.

[7-3-2a. VDP]
The VDP1540a (drawing control means) includes a built-in RAM that can temporarily store data in addition to the built-in sound source described above. As a part of such a built-in RAM, the VDP1540a includes a material image RAM that can temporarily store material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwrites a large number of material image data.

Further, when the screen data included in the screen generation schedule data is input from the peripheral control MPU1530a, the VDP1540a extracts the character data and the door frame side character data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data. Then, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated for displaying the sprite data on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored, and the image is further displayed. It also has a built-in VRAM for storing drawing data for one screen (one frame) for processing (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM").

The VDP1540a outputs the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and also outputs the door frame side effect display. By outputting the image data for the device 460 from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

When the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the VDP1540a in this way, the VDP1540a displays the input screen. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by extracting character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the data to create sprite data. Is generated on the built-in VRAM. Of the generated drawing data, the VDP1540a outputs the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and outputs the image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

The VDP1540a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display. When output to the device 460, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

The peripheral control MPU1530a executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1530a and VDP 1540a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The VDP1540a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In this embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

The VDP1540a extracts the sound command data of the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b when each sound command data including the reproduction channel is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a by the sound control by the automatic channel method described later based on the command from the main control board 1310. By controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data of the production sound such as BGM and sound effect is incorporated into the channel designated by the peripheral control MPU1530a. At the same time, the VDP 1540a controls the audio data transmission IC 1540c by using the playback channel specified by the automatic channel method described later from the peripheral control MPU 1530a, thereby causing BGM, sound effects, etc. from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Play the sound of. The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel into which the sound data is incorporated.

In addition to the sound data of the production sound and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the specified value (maximum volume value) of the volume related to the sound data of the notification sound is set for a plurality of channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP1540a. Subvolume value for is built in. With respect to the effect sound, any value of the substrate volumes 0 to 6 adjusted according to the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub volume value. On the other hand, with respect to the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub volume value regardless of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The sound command data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of each sound assigned to each playback channel.

When the notification sound is reproduced in a state where the above-mentioned effect sound is being reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, the effect sound is overwritten by the notification sound and only the notification sound is the pair of upper speakers 573 and the notification sound. It comes to be reproduced from a pair of lower speakers 921.

[7-3-2b. LCD and sound ROM]
Character data used for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b. Each sound data of the sound effect and the notification sound is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b. In this embodiment, the types of each sound are mainly classified into BGM (music), sound effects, and notification sounds.

In the present embodiment, as the types of each sound, for example, notification sounds 1 to 3 in which a playback request may occur regardless of the state of the game, and notification sounds such as a jackpot confirmation sound indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed are used. Listed. In addition, as the type of each sound, there are a normal BGM played in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol, a reach BGM played in the second half of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and a jackpot BGM played during the jackpot. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the effect sound of each sound, a hold winning sound in which a playback request is generated regardless of the state of the game, a button pressing sound in which a playback request is generated when a button is pressed, and a playback when the left symbol is stopped. Left symbol stop sound to be played, right symbol stop sound to be played when the right symbol is stopped, middle symbol stop sound to be played when the middle symbol is stopped, full-screen preview sound to be played when a full-screen notice occurs, and an accessory Character notice sound that is played when the notice occurs, first half notice A sound that is played when the first half notice A occurs, first half notice B sound that is played when the first half notice B occurs, first half First half notice C sound played when notice C occurs, second half notice A sound played when second half notice A occurs, second half notice B sound played when second half notice B occurs, In addition, the latter half notice C sound that is reproduced when the second half notice C occurs is illustrated.

[7-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When audio data is input from VDP1540a via a reproduction channel, the audio data transmission IC 1540c is a relay board for a door frame as a frame decoration drive amplifier board as a difference type serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. (And if necessary, it is transmitted to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160).

When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1540a is input in this way, the audio data transmission IC 1540c also uses the left side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data for the door frame relay board 911 and The data is transmitted toward the decorative board 160 (frame decorative drive amplifier board) on the left side of the door frame. As a result, the VDP1540a can reproduce the BGM, the sound effect, and the notification sound in stereo from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 via the audio data transmission IC 1540c when using two reproduction channels. On the other hand, when one reproduction channel is used, the BGM, the sound effect and the notification sound can be reproduced in monaural. In the present embodiment, it is illustrated that the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 are composed of four speakers, but it goes without saying that the number of speakers is not limited to this. Absent.

[7-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 205, the RTC control unit 1565 is configured around the RTC1565a, and holds, for example, calendar information in which the date can be specified and time information in which the hour, minute, and second can be specified.

The RTC1565a has a built-in RAM 1565aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as "RTC built-in RAM"). The RTC1565a is supplied with power from a battery 1565b (in this embodiment, a so-called button battery is adopted as an example) as a drive power source and a backup power source (second power source) for the RTC built-in RAM.

That is, the RTC1565a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 1565b independently of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the RTC1565a updates and holds the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 1565b even if the power from the main power supply that supplies the power is cut off.

In addition to the main power supply, the battery 1565b supplies power when it receives a power failure warning signal, which will be described later, while stopping the power supply when the main power supply starts supplying power. In such a power source form, the RTC1565a is supplied with power from the main power source or the battery 1565b.

The peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described above, and is based on the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect can be developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen on which the Christmas tree or reindeer appears is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year. It can be mentioned that the screen for executing the countdown for welcoming the above is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

Although the details of the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565 will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is mainly controlled from the time when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Information on the time until the time when the power-on command output from the board 1310 is received (second time point), that is, the power failure time is stored.

On the other hand, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. ing. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1530a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. ..

The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as date and time and hour, minute, and second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM. Information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU1530a is controlled to switch the backlight ON / OFF or ON when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type. Only.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year in which the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM includes brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained is stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit gaming state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

The brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM are related to, for example, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. When the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like. If the operation button 410 is operated during the period when the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like is performed, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed by the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like. Is displayed in.

By operating the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be adjusted to the desired brightness. Can be done. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1530a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected.

The peripheral control MPU1530a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. And turn on.

On the other hand, when 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the brightness is set. When the brightness of the LED included in the information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control power-on and reset process. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the BGM, the sound effect, and the notification sound reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 by rotating the knobs. it can. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 1510a is changed by rotating the knob portion. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak electrically connected to this converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, for example, a value 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023.

In the present embodiment, the value of the 1024 steps is divided into seven, and the volume value is managed as the substrate volume 0 to 6 as described above. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 (VDP1540a) outputs BGM, sound effects, and notification sounds from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, respectively, so as to be set to any of the tone values of the substrate volumes 0 to 6. It is configured to play.

[8. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209.

FIG. 206 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, and FIG. 207 shows an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It's a table. FIG. 208 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 of FIG. 207 to the peripheral control board 1510, and FIG. 209 shows various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310. It is a table showing an example.

First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, will be described, then various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described, and finally. Various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various sensors (switches) such as the general winning opening sensor 3020, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the large winning opening sensor 2402 and 2403. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board 951 based on these detection signals.

This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected (corresponding to a so-called “CR machine”), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H to command 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared in. The CR unit 6 drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko game machine 1 (payout device 830) by communicating with the pachinko game machine 1, and pays out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as rental balls. It is a device. One prize ball is designated by the command 10H described above, two prize balls are designated by the command 11H, ..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

On the other hand, when the pachinko game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine). The gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), and as shown in FIG. 206 (b), commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The ball lending machine is a device that directly dispenses game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates, as rental plates.

One prize ball is designated by the command 20H described above, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H, ..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H.

If the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of command reception is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input to connect. Check the status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal electric function effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display, test related, and others.

These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command. It has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode (MODE value) that indicates variations of the effect.

For these statuses (STTS values) and modes (MODE values), the values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter, also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage areas of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, of the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 1310, this command is decomposed in bit units and the status and mode can be grasped.

[8-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112, and the classification is related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191 as shown in FIG. 207. It is equipped with commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state specification at the time of fluctuation. To these various commands, "A * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command is a command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. Command. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command is a command for instructing the transition to at least one of the probability and the time saving state.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The synchronization effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process described later (command transmission means).

[8-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 3113, and the classification is related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191 as shown in FIG. 207. It is provided with commands named FIG. 2 start of synchronization effect, designation of special symbol 2, and end of special figure 2 synchronization effect. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot, and the special figure 2 synchronization effect. The end indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronized production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 207, the big hit related category includes the big hit opening, the big winning opening 1 open Nth display, the big winning opening 1 closed display, the big winning opening 1 count display, the big hit ending, the big hit symbol display, and the small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. Each of these commands is assigned a status of "C * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (, N of the jackpots 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit 2100). The command to indicate the opening of the first round or the opening of the opening is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (the opening of the large winning opening 1 of the attacker unit 2100 is being closed between the rounds 2005 and 2006). Or, the closing start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (a game in which the large winning opening 2005, 2006 is detected by the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403). The number of spheres) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display.

The small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command indicates the start of the small hit opening (during the small hit, the attacker unit's large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open or open). Then, the small hit count display command performs a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (an effect when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 during a small hit is detected by the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the big prize of the attacker unit). It is sent when the Nth round of mouths 2005 and 2006 is opened), and the command to display the closing of the large winning opening 1 is sent when the large winning opening 1 is closed (when the closing of the large winning opening 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit is started). , The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker unit is opened, and when the large winning opening 2005, 2006 is entered. The game ball is transmitted when it is detected by the big prize opening sensors 2403 and 2402), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the big winning opening is opened (the big prize of the attacker unit). It is transmitted when the mouths 2005 and 2006 are opened).

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit at the time of the small hit). The count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-large winning opening (when a game ball entered in the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 is detected by the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 during the small hit), and is small. The hit ending command is sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 207, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when the power is turned on. Is).

The power-on command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later Is executed, and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. 207, the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 is classified into the normal figure tuning effect. It is equipped with commands named normal symbol designation, normal figure synchronization production end, and state specification at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, the normal symbol specification command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot, and the normal figure synchronization effect end command is , The end of the normal figure synchronization effect is instructed, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is sent when the fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105, and the divisions are as shown in FIG. It has a command named ending per normal figure.

To these various commands, "F * H" is assigned as the status and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2105 expands in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2105). The ending command per normal map indicates the start of the ending per normal map.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 208, the notification display classification includes commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1). However, FIG. 208 shows a part of the commands prepared as the notification display. For example, the command when an abnormality is detected in the vibration sensor 2405 and the movable piece 2105 are in the open state. The explanation of various other commands such as a command when a start winning abnormality detection occurs when a game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004 when there is no such command is omitted.

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning 2103 opening other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker unit 2100). When the game ball is detected by the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The display command is, for example, when the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and any of the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, the grand prize opening sensor 2402, 2403, etc. occurs. Is instructed to start the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is instructed to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic sensor 2404.

The door frame opening command is a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951. , The door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is a door when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. It instructs the end of the release notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951. In some cases, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. In this case, the end of the main body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the grand prize opening sensor. It is transmitted when any of 2402, 2403, etc. is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic sensor 2404 is detected.

On the other hand, the door frame opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618).

The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). , The main body frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). .. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 208, the status display division includes commands named frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. 208. While setting it as a status, set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent at the time of power recovery, frame state change, and error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is sent at the time of power recovery. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 208, the test-related division includes various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of such a test command include a command for inspecting various substrates such as a peripheral control unit 1530, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, a relay board 911 for a door frame, and a decorative board 160 on the left side of the door frame. it can.

In this main control board 1310, ports for test commands are assigned one by one due to the convenience of the hardware side, so instead of a mode that is difficult to manage on the hardware side, it is used for test commands in order to make it easier to manage on the software side. As ports, those that can be managed by the software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to a specific port.

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later Is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 208, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Contains a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3112. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state. The high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from a high-probability state (corresponding to a probability fluctuation state described later) to a low-probability state (corresponding to a normal game state described later). The special symbol 1 storage command is still used for the variable display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002. It conveys the number of balls that have not been played (the number of pending balls). The special symbol 2 storage command is still used for the variable display of the special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. It conveys the number of balls that have not been played (the number of reserved balls). The normal symbol memory command is 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 hold (the number of balls that the game ball has passed through the gate 2350 and has not yet been used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. The number of holds)) is communicated.

The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) pre-reads the special symbol 1 before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the display board 1191. 1 It is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the hold.

The special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) pre-reads the special symbol 2 before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191. 2 It is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the hold. In this embodiment, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command are also collectively referred to as a "memory look-ahead effect command".

The start port winning command is issued when a detection signal is detected from the first start port sensor 3112 with the entry of the game ball into the first start port 2002 or with the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2004. When the detection signal is detected from the second starting port sensor 3113 (hereinafter, also referred to as "starting port winning"), the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3 mainly provide a voice to that effect. Is sent to notify.

The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed. The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted. The special symbol 1 memory command is still displayed when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation changes (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display 1403 on the function display board 1191 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is an unused hold number, when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the first special symbol display 1403 displays the variation of the special symbol. Will be sent when the number of holds decreases).

The special symbol 2 memory command is still displayed when the number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol 2 changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 on the function display board 1191 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is an unused hold number, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol change display on the second special symbol display 1405. When the number of holds decreases).

The normal symbol memory command is the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 when the normal symbol 1 operation hold ball number changes (the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the function display board 1191. In a certain state, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1189 for variable display of the normal symbol. ) Is sent.

The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation increases (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases). The special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described. As shown in FIG. 209, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into command categories named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. It is assumed that the priorities of the various commands are set in the order of frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2.

As the frame state 1 command, "out of ball", "full tank", "in stock of 50 or more", "connection abnormality", and "CR not connected" are prepared. When the ball is out, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit), and when the ball is full, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1). In stock of 50 or more, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3) when the connection is abnormal, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. .. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

"Ball-shaped", "counting switch error", and "retry error" are prepared for the error release navigation command. In the case of a ball, the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2), in the count switch error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the "counting switch error" indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 838 has occurred. The "retry error" means that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

For example, "during ball removal" is prepared for the frame state 2 command. The value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and B7. The value 0 is set to.

The transmission timing of these various commands is as follows. The frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed. The error release navigation command is sent during error release navigation. The frame state 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[9. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 210. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the main control side. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, it is mainly used for determining a big hit determination random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and for determining an initial value of this big hit determination random number. A random number for determining the initial value for determining the jackpot, a random number for determining the reach for determining whether to generate reach (out of reach) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and the first special symbol display 1403. And the random number for the fluctuation pattern used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol when the jackpot game state is generated. A random number for a jackpot symbol used for determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the display 1405 and a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol used for determining an initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol are prepared. The above-mentioned random numbers for the big hit symbol are used to determine the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the small hit game state is generated. It is also used as a random number.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 are used to determine the initial value. A random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, a random number for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern to be used for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is composed of hardware built into the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is 0 as the minimum value). ~ The maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination.

When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter".

The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number update method.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit judgment random number is counted up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for big hit judgment. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is based on the ID code taken out by the main control MPU 1310a from the built-in non-volatile RAM. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is executed, and the derived fixed value is set.

The case where the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared means that the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when the power is turned on, or the main control MPU 1310a is used in the main control side power-on processing described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). The case where the value does not match the value of the thumb (sum value) can be mentioned.

The above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment is derived using the ID code, and it is prevented from being analyzed by taking the following two-step security measures. To.

First, as a first security measure, if the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a stores the ID code in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, the ID code will not be rewritten even if an external device is used. That is. On the other hand, as a second security measure, the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for jackpot determination will be described.

For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment value match, the ID code has a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided in the other game board.

That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board, that is, another pachinko gaming machine. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game ball is inserted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 at each predetermined interval, a jackpot gaming state cannot be generated. ..

[9-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU1310a takes out an ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and then generates a random number for jackpot determination based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter to be updated is executed. This derived fixed value is set in the initial value update type counter.

In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number as the big hit judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set.

In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table.

In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value as a minimum value to a value of 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range), a case where a value 10 to a value 209 is set with a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set with a high probability is illustrated.

That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random numbers to be acquired at the same time is 200, except when the acquisition times of the random numbers are different. Other than that, for example, it is a prime number.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from that of the big hit determination random number (for example, the value of the big hit game mode determination random number acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 described later). , It is possible to prevent the number of random numbers that are big hits from being prime numbers. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, a random number for determining a big hit, which is the number of big hit symbols (200) divided by 4 (50) with a low probability.

Considering the case where such a jackpot judgment value range is set, the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It will be set in the range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) with.

In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 to the time when the first value 10 in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) and this value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes value 0 to the last value (value 209 in low probability, value 339 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Comparing with the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range.

Then, for example, the game ball is generated by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming the value of is high.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, it is before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0. The period from the initial value (value 32668 in low probability, value 31768 in high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) and the period until the value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). Compared with the above, the former period has a much higher probability of being drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process than the latter period.

In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Comparing the range up to and the range from the first value (value 32668 with high probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high.

Then, the initial value update type counter ranges from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values becomes the value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment. Therefore, the value obtained in this lottery is directed toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery.

When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value (low) before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 The period until the value reaches 32667 in probability and 31767) in high probability becomes irregular, and is rich in randomness.

As a result, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that pretends to have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range). , It can be said that the probability of becoming either value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0.

The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from the time T0 is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. ..

The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the 4th cycle from the time T1 is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. ..

In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving a fluctuation to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) (periodicity). (By eliminating the), it is not detected by the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Do.

When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address on the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC 22.

The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the logical value becomes HI when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, the logical value becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning.

Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set.

In the determination in step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15).

Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when latching the state in which the logical value is LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal.

Following step S15, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated (step S16).

In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done.

Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 952 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 952 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20).

That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side).

The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, wait until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A by the liquid crystal of the peripheral control board 1510 and the sound control unit 1540 is started (booted). There is. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased.

When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S26, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30).

The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S32).

In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU1310a (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery information is read. Is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S28. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S36).

That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing a value of 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it.

The main control MPU 1310a normally performs the processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not finished, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken-out ID code. An initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as a random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number.

Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on for clearing the main control built-in RAM and notifying that the initial setting has been performed is created, and various peripheral control boards 1510 are created. Create test commands that are classified as test-related for performing inspections, and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Following step S44, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means).

Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for fluctuation pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hit, random number for ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If there is no signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S52). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the rewriting of game information.

Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S53, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2105, an attacker solenoid 2108A, 2108B, a first special symbol display 1403, a second special symbol display 1405, an upper special symbol memory display 1184, and a lower special symbol storage. The drive signal output to the display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S58). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S58, the main control program sets the watch dock timer to clear (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, so that the watch dock timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is reset, and then the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S28, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S30, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[9-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Specifically, this main control program enters, for example, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2001,2201, and the large winning opening 2005,2006. Detection signals from the large winning opening sensors 2403 and 2402 that detect the balled game ball, detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3112 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, to the second starting port 2004 A detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113 that detects the entered game ball, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2350, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the detection signal from, the detection signal from the other omitted sensors, and the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process described later. , Are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

A detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from a second start port sensor 3113 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each of them is read, the start opening winning command corresponding to the other is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113. Then, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large game balls entering the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are detected. The detection signal from the winning port sensors 2403 and 2402, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3112 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and the game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 are detected. When the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time. After a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as a second time.

The result read this second time and the result read the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program is from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2352. Chattering and noise are generated by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the detection signal twice for the first to third times and the other for comparing the detection signals for the second to fourth times. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of the above, the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2352 The reliability of the detection signal can be improved.

Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the variation time (first special variation time) in which the first special symbol display 1403 is lit according to the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. , Special fluctuation time) and fluctuation time when the second special symbol display 1405 lights up (second special fluctuation time, special fluctuation time), fluctuation pattern determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later (ordinary symbol) In addition to the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) in which the normal symbol display 1189 lights according to the fluctuation pattern), it conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). When determining whether or not the payer ACK signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed.

Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. When the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S76, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the small hit symbol, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process). The random number for determining the initial value is also updated.

These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment), so each counter is used only each time the winning random number update process is performed. Counts up.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0).

When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining a normal symbol hit is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining a big hit described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are used in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process). The non-winning random number update process in step S50 and the hit random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively.

Each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and the main processing on the main control side is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated to update the non-winning random number in step S50. When the number of times of processing is random, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are used in the non-winning random number update process in step S50. It may be a mechanism to update only.

Following step S78, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on the input information, or with the main control board 1310. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 951 and the board is created. This main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and for example, when the game ball is accepted into the large prize opening 2103, the large winning opening sensor 2402, The detection information based on the detection signal output from 2403 was written to the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time for several minutes of the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006. For example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls, and is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (payout control means).

When, for example, two large winning openings, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, are provided, the main control program is previously set in the main control RAM as the definition bit area described above. From the plurality of definition bit areas prepared, each of the two definition bits for the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 is used. Hereinafter, they are referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in this order. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a game board in which the number of large winning openings is one, one definition bit area is used.

These definition bit areas used are, for example, 1 bit, and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted by the large winning opening 2103, for example, "1" is written in the first definition bit area where "1" is, for example, the 4th bit as detection information based on the detection signal output from the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403. Is done. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted by writing, for example, "0", and is provided for accepting the next game ball.

Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit region state to check. For example, if the main control program sets the definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 of the large winning opening 2103 to the fourth bit, the main control program acquires the information of the definition bit area of the fourth bit. ..

Further, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information acquired in this way according to the effective range of the prize balls of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 described later, creates a prize ball command, and stores the detection information in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to write and not output to the payout control board 951.

If it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program masks each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signals from the above-mentioned large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 is written. For example, the bit may be forcibly set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

In this prize ball control process, the main control program indicates that one game ball has been accepted by the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the first special game state. Taking the opportunity that the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2402 or the second prize opening 2403 is written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to any one of the prize openings, for example, 15 balls are paid as prize balls. A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that it should be issued, and is written in the transmission information storage area described above.

At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the speaker, for example, ". Output a "pocon" sound.

On the other hand, the main control program is the first large winning opening sensor 2403 or the second indicating that one game ball has been accepted by the first large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 in the first special gaming state. If the detection information based on the detection signal from the grand prize opening sensor 2402 is not written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to any of these grand winning openings, for example, a prize ball indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls. Do not create a prize ball command as an instruction.

In this case as well, the main control program writes the winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (payout control means). Prevents the payout operation of the game ball from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to any one of these large winning openings, and obtains detection information based on the detection signal from the first major winning opening sensor 2403 or the second major winning opening sensor 2403. By clearing it, the game ball will be allowed to be paid out.

At this time, when the main control program pays out more than the specified number of game balls that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the large winning opening 2103, the winning excess abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 36 is omitted). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU1530a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

By doing so, it is possible to minimize the damage suffered by the game hall (game hall) because the illegal game ball is not substantially paid out.

On the other hand, instead, when the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 is detected, the main control program immediately writes the winning excess abnormality command to the transmission information storage area of the peripheral control MPU1530a. The control may be made to notify the speaker.

After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits it to the payout control board 951 (payout control means).

According to the above, when the game ball is accepted for the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006, the first big winning opening sensor 2403 or the second big winning opening sensor 2403 corresponding to each is received. Can be confirmed by hearing whether or not is functioning.

On the other hand, in this main control program, when the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A self-check command for confirming the connection status between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951.

Following step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 952.

In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. The main control program formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame). State 2 command)), the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S82, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the big winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103 when the game is not in the big hit game state, etc. The main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. That is, with the start winning as a trigger (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out for each start memory information for which the start condition is satisfied and used as a big hit random number value, and this big hit random number value is built in the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as a "special lottery".

The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches this jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). ) In the case, shift from the normal game state to the big hit game state. This jackpot gaming state corresponds to a special gaming state, a first special gaming state, and a second special gaming state, which will be described later, and shall indicate a gaming state that collectively refers to these.

When the main control program determines the jackpot game mode, the data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (see FIG. 107), which will be described later, includes, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time, and the like. Definition that the definition data (table) representing the open time and the number of winning limit counts of the game ball is a part of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM specified by the address offset according to the number of big winning openings. Reading from the data area (not shown).

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the random value for jackpot matches the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (the present embodiment). Then this is also called "special lottery").

This main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the lottery result, and the big hit random number value matches this probability variation hit determination value (the probability variation transition condition is satisfied). In that case, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state after that, while if the jackpot random number value does not match this probability change hit judgment value (the condition is not satisfied after the probability change), the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change ( Winning probability control means). Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program has a special variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined as a result of each special lottery according to the lottery result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery. The variation pattern command including the time (variation time) and the winning / failing information of each special lottery is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program creates various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect according to the lottery result of the first special lottery described above, while the second special lottery described above Create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect according to the lottery result. As described above, the main control program stores the created various commands as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

At the same time, the main control program determines the start hold display mode with reference to the advance judgment table (not shown) based on various random number values acquired with the start winning as a trigger, and displays the fluctuation after the start winning. Before disclosing the stop symbol of the special symbol, a command used to execute a process of implying the lottery result of the special lottery in advance (hereinafter referred to as "preceding judgment process") (hereinafter, "change in the number of reserved balls" as an example). When a command ") is created and this advance determination process should be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

At this time, instead of the random number value itself of the special lottery, the main control program includes information on the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game as described later in this hold ball number change command. I am trying to do it. The details of this advance determination process will be described later.

Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal so as to light the first special symbol display 1403 according to the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, according to the type of the special symbol, or the second special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to turn on the 1405, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

For example, when shifting to the jackpot game state, the main control program has various commands classified as jackpot related (big hit opening command, jackpot 1 open Nth display command, jackpot 1 closed display command, jackpot 1 closed display command, jackpot 1 open). 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108A or attacker solenoid 2108B is used to open and close the opening / closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

The main control program makes two rounds so that the two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on when the number of times (rounds) that the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are changed from the closed state to the open state is two times. The output of the lighting signal to the indicator lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 6-round indicator lamp so as to turn on the 6-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 6 times, and outputs information as output information. Store in the storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round indicator lamp so as to turn on the 12-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 12 times, and outputs information as output information. Store in the storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 16-round indicator lamp so as to turn on the 16-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 16 times, and stores the output information as output information. Store in the area.

The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the game state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, while further an example of the transition condition. When the probabilistic transition transition condition is satisfied, the probabilistic game state as an example of the specific gaming state is also shifted (game state control means).

Here, the main control program may shift to the probabilistic game state as an example of the specific game state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit game state. It should be noted that the specific gaming state may be a state in which the time saving operating condition is satisfied as another example of the transition condition and the time saving function is operating, or both at the same time in combination with the above-mentioned probability variation gaming state. It may be in a gaming state.

Following step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and performs gate winning processing based on the input information.

In this gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, etc. when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and uses the main control built-in RAM as gate information. It is stored in the gate information storage area of.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. .. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas.

Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and performs the main control. It is determined whether or not the value matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). The main control program determines whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (lottery result by the ordinary lottery).

When the main control program opens and closes according to this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state. Furthermore, the main control program determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination based on the value of the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern described above, and creates various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect. In addition to storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area.

When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination taken out matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program creates various commands related to the normal electric service effect. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 while being stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program uses the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern random number. The normal symbol variation pattern is determined based on this. The main control program creates various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, stores them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turns on the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol variation pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and outputs various signals based on the output information.

This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. The start port solenoid 2105 that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that open and close the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2103 and opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 2106 when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to outputting the drive signal to, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as an output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 (command). Transmission means).

This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. (For example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display (door frame opening command, door frame) Close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified into test-related commands, and others Various commands classified into are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the frame state 1 command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the error release navigation command is issued to the peripheral control board 1510. Send. In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the main body frame opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the main body frame closing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. .. In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door frame opening command from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the door frame opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the door closing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) registers (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 1310a stores the contents of the general-purpose register in the stack and saves them in hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed.

In step S96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 1310a sets interrupt enable after returning in step S96.

[10. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 229. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, and FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 213. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 214. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of the rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball scuffing determination process, and FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, and FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring processing. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball motion determination setting process, FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball ball motion setting process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, and FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process, and FIG. 229 is a timing chart showing the signal process (a) and the input signal confirmation process (a) from the CR unit during the payout operation by ball lending.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, and prize. Ball prize ball stock number addition process, ball rental prize ball stock number addition process, stock monitoring process, payout ball motion judgment setting process, payout setting process, ball ball motion setting process, retry motion monitoring process, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described.

By the way, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball shaving judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball motion determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is done as a process. In addition, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset judgment processing, error cancellation operation judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, The order of priority is set in the order of the prize ball stock number addition process for lending, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball motion determination setting process.

[10-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU954a, as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215, the payout control unit power supply. Performs on-time processing.

When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode for the payout control MPU954a (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU954a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU954a are set.

Following step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 provides a power failure warning signal (payout power failure). Notice signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

The wait timer process 1 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on (step S506). In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is, for example, 200 milliseconds. (Ms) is set. In the determination in step S508, the payout control program is performed based on the power failure warning signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 952 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and it is determined that the operation switch does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. When it is determined that the operation switch 952 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the operation switch 952 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514).

That is, the payout control program is capable of executing the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the payout control MPU954a (hereinafter, also referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Operation control means when the power is turned on on the payout control side).

On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU954a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, various information). The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information whose status is set), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. Will be done.

The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU954a.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address put on the stack for temporary storage. The payout control program advances the stack pointer each time the stack is stacked.

In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates the checksum (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (power down) described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528).

The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power failure processing described later. The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, while it is set to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed. ..

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530).

In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU954a (hereinafter, also referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is cut off, but also a state in which the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S522 (that is, when the payout information is deleted), when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or in step S526. When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528 (that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed), the payout control program is used in the payout control built-in RAM. Clear all areas (step S532).

That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process when the operation signal of the operation switch 952 is detected (the payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control program sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is used as the main control board. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, but 2 ms has not elapsed. Sometimes it is set to a value of 0.

In step S542, when the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input. Is determined.

On the other hand, in step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU954a based on the various information.

In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 834 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 953 are stored.

Based on this output information, the payout control program sends a payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310 when it normally receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. It outputs, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834, and outputs the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 to the external terminal board 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, payout). Every time the motor 834 actually pays out 10 game balls, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784), and the display signal is output to the error LED display 953.

Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU954a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 952, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the detection signal from the counting switch 838, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal. , The main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. ..

Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the payout control program is set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not a ball is in a squeezed state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. The ball squeeze judgment time, the skip judgment time set when the fixed position judgment of the payout rotating body is not performed, and the game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are set when the game ball is discharged. Ball removal judgment time, full tank judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is stored is full, ball out detection sensor 827 When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from, the ball out determination time set as the determination condition, etc. Manage time. In addition, in this timer update process, the payout control program does not match the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body with the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838. Inconsistency counter for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the inconsistency counter set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the INCC. Manage the reset judgment time.

For example, when the ball squeeze determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the payout control program subtracts the ball squeeze determination time by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the sphere squeeze determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). The payout control program subtracts the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed. This payout control program accurately measures the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU954a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure.

As a result, even if the payout control program cannot continue the payout operation due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while executing the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. Since the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency.

In other words, the payout control MPU954a momentarily stops or loses power when the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pain control MPU954a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the payout of the game ball is continued. It can be carried out.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU954a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. It has become. As a result, various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU954a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU954a) and the CR unit 6.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the payout control program is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery, and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Read the PRDY signal output setting information from. In this CR communication process, the payout control program is set to the state of the logical value of the PRDY signal that tells that the read out PRDY signal output setting information is, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. If so, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a.

The payout control program is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, the prize ball information storage area included in the payout backup information and stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Based on the value of the inconsistency counter INCC, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program determines that the retry operation is abnormally operating, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. It is determined that there is, and the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG.

In the payout control program, in the payout ball movement determination setting process, as a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when the CR unit 6 is not in communication, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. The state (LOW) of the logical value of the PRDY signal that conveys the fact is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the state of the logical value of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. Output from the terminal to the CR unit 6.

In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. At the same time, it is possible to inform the CR unit 6 that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logical value is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko gaming machine. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is set as HI and is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a.

On the other hand, when the logical value is LOW, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. When not electrically connected, the payout control program sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW and a predetermined output of the payout control MPU954a in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the port.

The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 951. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the payout control program reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 causes the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540. It is determined whether or not the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-mentioned payout device 830 by the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827. Determine if the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

For example, to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full, the full tank switch is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the 550 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is from OFF to ON. When the transition to, the payout control program starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above in the timer update process in step S552.

When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the payout control program turns on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 in this full tank and ball out check process. It is determined whether or not it is. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the payout control program provides full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. It is stored in the state information storage area described above.

On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the payout control program stores the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full. Store in the area.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball out switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827 is from OFF to ON. When the transition to, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time (119 ms) described above.

When the ball-out judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out judgment time is reached, the payout control program sends a detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 827 in this full tank and ball-out check process. It is determined whether or not it is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 827 is ON, the ball-out information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball out. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, the payout control program receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310, such as a prize ball command and a self-check command.

When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball pulling, and ball scooping are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 of the payout control board 951 is created, and the LED display information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. Remember.

For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame) are classified into status displays based on the various information. A close command, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) are created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the ball-out information when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310.

In this command transmission process, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error related to the payout operation of the game ball, the payout control program provides information on the part where the error occurs related to the payout operation (hereinafter, "error"). The frame state 1 command (first error release command) including the occurrence position information) is generated (error generation command generation means).

On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-mentioned error occurs when the payout control program detects that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 is detected. Output the release navigation command (first error release command) (command sending means).

This payout control program transmits a main body frame opening command when a main body frame opening detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619. On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command when the main body frame closing detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the door frame opening detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame opening command. On the other hand, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618.

In the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), the payout control program reads error information including the error content from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and identifies the machine number information and the error from other pachinko gaming machines. An error information signal based on the information is output to a hall computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 784.

When the hall computer receives this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk is identified based on the unit number information. It is possible to grasp that the error content included in the error information has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine of the number.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal (payout power failure notice signal) is input in step S540. judge. If this power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is not input, the payout control program determines in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms progress flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms progress flag HT-FLG is set. When the value is 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, and the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546.

The payout control program performs the port output process in step S548 and the port input process in step S550. The payout control program performs timer update processing in step S552, CR communication processing in step S554, and full tank and ball out check processing in step S556. The payout control program performs command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, main operation setting processing in step S562, and LED display data creation processing in step S564.

The payout control program performs a command transmission process in step S566, sets a value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and repeats steps S539 to S568. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU954a varies. In the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU954a preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310 indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. As a result, the payout control MPU954a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control program sets the watch dock timer to clear (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watch dock timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU954a is reset, and then the payout control MPU954a executes the payout control unit power-on processing again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU954a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[10-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to disabled under the control of the payout control MPU954a and switches (saves) the register. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[10-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 840 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU954a to rotate the rotation angle from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 217. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610).

This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation angle switch detection history information LSB-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. When there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program has a detection slit for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is determined that the optical axis of is in a state of transition from a blocked state to a non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In this shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 1 (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process is executed (step S618). In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information LSB-HIST read in step S610. The most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Shifts bit by bit.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 0 (step S620), and ends this routine.

In this way, each time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is bladed. The least significant bit B0 is set according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 is transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit is in the state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. A value of 1 or a value of 0 is set. Therefore, the history of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is created.

[10-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not bulged.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU954a, and as shown in FIG. 218, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP- It is determined whether or not the FLG has a value of 0 (step S630).

This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the value is 1, and the payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the fixed position of the body is determined (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program uses the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634).

This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0 and the lower 4 bits. B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit described above is the light of the blade rotation detection switch 840 in succession in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state.

When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 834 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the payout rotating body due to this backlash The rotation is designed to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 834.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control program creates the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST by the history of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 and the rotation angle switch history creation process, and the created rotation angle. Switch detection history information The lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of RSW-HIST, that is, the fixed position of the payout rotating body is determined based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 due to the occurrence of the latest 4 timer interrupt cycles. ..

As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotation position of the payout motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. A value of 1 is set in the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control program sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program effectively sets the skip determination time (step S638) and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed so as to be equally divided (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board. As described above, the rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is configured to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 834.

The payout control program manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. Specifically, (1) a transient state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from a blocking state to a non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit is a blade. The state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 is transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (referred to as "fixed position fixed state"), and (3) the detection slit cuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocked state. It is managed in three states: a state that has transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”).

Each state corresponds to the following rotation. That is, the edge detection state of (1) corresponds to the rotation of one step of the payout motor 834, and the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 834, and the fixed position determination of (3). In the skip state, it corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 834 in 13 steps. In this way, the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection panel, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 834. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes effective in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). The payout control program subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result reaches a value of 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to an initial value of 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. To do. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU954a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. Generally, when game balls rub against each other and are charged by friction, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise.

Therefore, the payout device 830 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the payout device 830 is provided with a blade rotation detection switch 840, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. The wiring (harness) that connects the payout control board 951 and the board 754 in the prize ball case in the payout device 830 is also susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-mentioned fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit shuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state. In the state of transition to, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is improved. Since the cycle and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[10-5. Ball shaving judgment processing]
Next, the ball bending determination process will be described. This ball squeeze determination process determines whether or not a sphere is squeezed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze determination process is started, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU954a to detect the rotation angle switch from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 219. The information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value.

As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, it is "0000111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. Assuming that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball-squeezing state has not occurred, this routine is used as it is. finish.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program Sets the value 1 to the ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-sucking flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-sucking state is generated by the payout rotating body, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing a ball-sucking operation. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 when the ball is not squeezing.

Following step S644, the payout control program effectively sets the ball squeeze determination time (step S646) and ends this routine. When the ball squeeze determination time becomes effective, the sphere squeeze determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process).

[10-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processes will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls and a prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls. This prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the prize ball command described later from the main control board 1310, and the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls is the CR unit 6 This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball lending request signal from. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described.

In this embodiment, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for prize balls is set to be preferentially performed. After the game balls corresponding to the number of prize ball stocks added in the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls are paid out by the payout device 830, the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls is set to be performed. There is.

[10-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 issues a prize ball command under the control of the payout control MPU954a, as shown in FIG. 220. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650).

This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as the received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

The payout control program terminates this routine as it is when the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, and the number of prize balls corresponding to this prize ball command when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650. The PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, it has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). There is.

As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from this prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the number of prize balls PBV read in step S652 to the number of prize ball stocks PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[10-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental]
Next, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending will be described. When the process of adding the number of prize balls for ball rental is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program requests the ball rental as shown in FIG. 221 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660).

This determination is made based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

The payout control program terminates this routine as it is when there is no ball lending request signal in step S660, while when there is a ball lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program records the prize ball from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The stock number PBS is read out (step S662). The payout control program adds the number of rented balls RBV to the number of prize ball stocks PBS (step S664), and ends this routine.

The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball lending request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area.

In the present embodiment, since the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the ball lending are managed separately), the ball lending request signal is held even when there is a ball lending request signal, and the prize is awarded. When the ball is paid out, the ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball lending is paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS reaches a value of 0.

[10-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not the player continues the game in a state (stocked state) in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is filled with the game balls stored during the game.

When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 222 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. Step S670), it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value of 1 (step S674) and ends this routine. With this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stock described above) reaches the caution threshold TH or higher. It is a flag indicating that the value is set to 1 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is reached, and to a value 0 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is not reached.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value 0 (step S676) and ends this routine.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and watches the effect unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, the player inadvertently waits for one round. , The game ball paid out as a prize ball may be forgotten to be removed from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls begin to accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes above the caution threshold TH, and various types provided on the door frame 3 as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on the decorative board flash. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 302, and the player plays the game with the game ball filled in the lower plate 302 (accommodation space of the foul cover unit). Can be prevented from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value 50, which corresponds to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall to call attention to the player's game at the earliest possible stage.

[10-8. Payout ball movement judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball motion determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the payout motor 834 pays out the game ball to the upper plate or the lower plate, performs the ball-to-ball operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. It is a process to set to any of.

When the payout ball operation determination setting process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes the rotation angle switch history information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU954a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S680).

Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, it is "0000111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retry). The value is set to 0 when the operation is normal).

When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S682 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S682, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball-filled flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. (Step S686).

The ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squashing state is generated by the pay-out rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the pay-out motor 834 is transmitted, and the pay-out motor 834 is a ball-squeezing flag. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball is not performing the motion.

When the ball-squeezing flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-squeezing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the region (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is an unpaid number of balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 834.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is full with the stored game balls. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit). Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is stored is full.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is not full in the game ball stored in step S692, the payout control program performs the payout setting process described later (step S694), and ends this routine. In this payout setting process, a payout operation is performed in which the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is full with the stored game ball in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped. If a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 834 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added and increased by the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. Become.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game ball is not paid out.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the ball-grinding operation is performed, the payout control program performs the ball-grinding operation setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In this ball-grinding motion setting process, a ball-grinding motion is performed to eliminate the ball-grinding state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 830.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704) and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU954a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent (CR unit 6). When the logical value of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logical state of the PRDY signal is used as the PRDY signal output setting information. Set and store in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, the payout control program has a CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 215. The PRDY signal output setting information is read from, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW is lent out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a of the payout control unit 954. Output to the CR unit 6 via the device connection terminal board 869.

On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logical state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program determines. The logical state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, the payout control program has an EXE signal from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 215. The output setting information is read, and the read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logical value is maintained is read from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Output to CR unit 6.

Note that "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained and the logical value of the EXS signal is changed. When it is HI (the XS signal is held up), it is to maintain its logical HI.

[10-8-1. Payout setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to set the game ball to be paid out.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program outputs the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 224 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV has a value of 0 (step S712). In this determination, whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains is determined based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops (stops) the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads out the actual ball count PB (step S718). This actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, this counting is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input processing of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main processing of the payout control unit). The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set in the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are values 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not a value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process).

Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds a value of 1 to the actual ball counting PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is in the case of decrementing the drive command number DRV in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU954a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination in step S728, that is, in fact. If it is not incremented to the ball count PB, it is said that one ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. to decide.

Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-mentioned step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again.

As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball counting PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, the retry operation to pay out the one ball to be paid out can be performed again. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game ball is not paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the unpaid game ball.

[10-8-2. Ball motion setting process]
Next, the ball-shaped motion setting process will be described. In this ball squeezing operation setting process, it is a process of setting to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program elapses the ball squeeze determination time as shown in FIG. 225 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. It is determined whether or not the program has been performed (step S750). This determination is made based on the ball squeeze determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the ball bending determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball squeezing determination time has elapsed.

When the ball squeeze determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S752). ..

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value.

As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program determines. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set so that the ball is squeezed (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the payout control program sets the value 0 in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squatting state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing a ball-sucking operation. When no operation is performed (end of ball-sliding operation), the values are set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent at present, the payout control MPU954a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logical value of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, That is, when the PRDY signal is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember.

As a result, the payout control program is stored in the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process (step S554) of the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information is read from, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW is lent out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a of the payout control unit 954. Output to the CR unit 6 via the device connection terminal board 869.

On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logical state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program determines. The logical state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the payout control program is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication information storage area. The EXS signal output setting information is read from the output terminal of the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and the read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logical value is maintained is 869. Is output to the CR unit 6 via.

As described above, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained. When the logical value of the EXS signal is HI (the EXS signal is held up and held), the logical HI is maintained.

Following step S764, the payout control program sets the value 0 in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[10-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU954a, and as shown in FIG. 226, the rotation angle of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)". As for the fixed position determination value, the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S772, the payout control program determines whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match. Do.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. Only the value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774).

The inconsistency counter INCC is composed of the number of game balls that are received and discharged in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. It is a counter for calculating the difference. This mismatch counter INCC usually has a value of 0 because the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 match. Become.

Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the actual number of game balls to be paid out are detected by the counting switch 838 by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the payout of the game balls that do not match due to the mismatch between the number of balls and the number of balls is repeated.

The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match. Occasionally, the payout control program determines if there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776).

This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778). ..

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is less than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent gaming ball is paid out due to the retry operation is about 1 in millions, and in the present embodiment, the inconsistency threshold value is obtained. A value of 5 is set as INCTH.

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-on process (step S530) shown in FIG. 215, as described above, the payout backup stored in the payout control built-in RAM at the time of power recovery. The information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, which is information.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored as the payout backup information. can do. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the payout device 830, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery.

Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device. It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the 830 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780.

On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780 even at the time of power recovery.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCH is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program determines the "retry error". In order to notify that, the error LED display 953, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951, is set with retry error information for displaying the number “5”, and the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782).

On the other hand, in the case of notifying that "the prize ball is in stock", the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock that displays the number "9" on the error LED display 953 and has the above-mentioned built-in payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784).

In step S784, the inconsistent counter INCC is set when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. , It is initialized when this internal factor occurs.

The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a RAM clear signal.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the above-mentioned main control program erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and outputs the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the RAM clear notification sound from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3.

Following step S784, the payout control program sets the retry error flag RTERR-FLG to a value of 1 (step S786) and ends this routine. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating, and is set to a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, while the retry operation is not abnormally operating. When (the retry operation is operating normally), the value is set to 0.

Under the control of the payout control MPU954a, the payout control program sets (stores) the retry error information (or information in the prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782, and supplies the payout control unit power supply. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the on-time process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

The payout control program creates display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process, and stores it in the output information storage area as LED display information. As a result, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 953 based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process, and the number "5" is output to the error LED display 953. Is displayed.

In the main control board 1310, the main control program transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process. The peripheral control board 1510 issues a door frame side lighting / blinking command that outputs a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The output is output to the relay board 911 for the frame and the decorative board 160 on the left side of the door frame, and the corresponding plurality of LEDs are made to emit light in a predetermined color.

As described above, the clerk in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs displayed the number "" on the error LED display 953 mounted on the payout control board 951 by opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that, for example, a "retry error" has occurred.

As a result, the clerk in the hall, etc., in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 838, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 951, and the poor contact of various connectors. This can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of a plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 953 are not notified.

By intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838, the above-mentioned retry operation is performed because it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed by forcibly generating, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC described above becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, Since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like will notice this issuing mode and rush to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838 can be suppressed to an extremely small value.

Further, as described above, the inconsistent counter INCC is set when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or higher than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when the internal factor that it has become is generated.

As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when, for example, an external factor such as operating the operation switch 952 to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU954a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. Absent.

[10-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the inconsistency counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and discharged in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 are used. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 227 under the control of the payout control MPU954a. It is determined whether or not the elapse has passed (step S790).

This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process (step S552) in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S790, the payout control program reads the time management information from the time management information storage area and determines whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the inconsistency counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to an initial value of 7000s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the payout control program sets the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM to a value 0 (initial value 0) (step S794), and this routine To finish.

As described above, the mismatch counter INCC was detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of game balls that were received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 was transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the game ball which is usually received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. The value is 0 because it is done.

Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process under the control of the payout control MPU954a, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual number of game balls actually paid out. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 and the inconsistent payout of the game balls due to the inconsistency are repeated.

Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 5 and a frame such as a main body frame 4 on which the gaming board 5 is mounted, and the game is played by exchanging the gaming board 5 (replacement of a new machine). It is configured so that the specifications can be changed. Therefore, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout device 830, and the power supply board that generates the drive power supply for the payout device 830 and the control power supply for the payout control board 951 are provided on the frame side as a common function.

In the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, it is abnormal whether or not the payout control program repeatedly performs the retry operation by monitoring the mismatch counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU954a. It is configured so that the operation can be determined. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is cut off, while the process in step S530 (restore the RAM work area) in the payout control unit power-on process. In the power setting), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

[10-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 952 is operated.

When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 cancels the error by the payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU954a, as shown in FIG. 228. It is determined whether or not the operation is performed (step S800).

This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area and instruct to cancel the error when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. While it is determined that the operation switch 952 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the error is cleared and the operation switch 952 is operated. Judged as

When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs an error flag status confirmation process. (Step S802).

In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the payout device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, this retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, while when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is operating normally). Sometimes it is set to a value of 0. Therefore, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 0 or a value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU954a.

Following step S802, the state information setting process is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit), the payout control program reads various information (state information) from the state information storage area, and the read state is read. A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program causes an error in the retry operation. The retry error information indicating that it has occurred is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. Then, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit), the payout control program creates a retry error status command and transmits it to the main control board 1310. ..

The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information is transmitted by the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the retry error information. The sub-control program performs retry operation error notification processing for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation.

In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Please check the harness of the payout control board" is repeated, for example, twice. By reproducing from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in the above and the speaker of the door frame 3, the clerk in the hall or the like is notified.

The clerk in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation reported the malfunction of the counting switch 838, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 951, the contact failure of various connectors, etc. This can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 573 or the pair of lower speakers 921. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

Following step S804, the release setting process is performed (step S806). In this release setting process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag The error corresponding to is already forcibly stopped from the content displayed by the error LED display 953, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951, and the ball can be rented. In order to transmit the above-mentioned PRDY signal logic to the CR unit 6, the above-mentioned PRDY signal logic is held in the HI, that is, in the activated state, and from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a of the payout control unit 954 to the game ball rental device connection terminal. Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869.

For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program has already set the error LED display. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" indicating that it is a "retry error" displayed by 953, the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is used. Forcibly overwrite the information displayed with the figure "-" notifying that it is "normal".

In order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the payout control program is the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. Is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs an error flag initialization process (step S808), and ends this routine. In this error flag initialization process, if the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag status is determined. Initialize the error flag.

For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the PRDY signal output setting information is set from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW is read from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the CR unit 6 Output to.

As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program determines this internal factor. In step S786 of the same process, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and when the operation switch 952 is operated, this is the trigger, that is, this external factor has occurred. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized.

When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM in order to clear the RAM, that is, the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM. Similar to the case where the switch 952 is operated, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control side main processing executes the operation switch 952 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used to clear the error that occurred in the payout operation, from the time when the power is turned on. An operation for exerting the RAM clear function for starting the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until the error is performed. It is functioning as a department.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error generated in the payout operation of the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined time. Here, even if the hall clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko game machine, as long as he / she remembers the position of the operation switch 952 on the back of the game machine, he / she can operate the operation switch 952 according to the timing of operating the operation switch 952. If a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred in the payout operation of the game ball is exerted, and on the other hand, depending on the timing when the operation switch 952 is operated, it is from the time the power is turned on. Within a predetermined time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted.

Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a game machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation when dealing with the error and can appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be restarted before the player is discouraged from playing.

[10-12. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 215 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6.

First, the signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is used as the number of balls to be rented. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 will be described.

The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and are stored in the read input information. In the CR communication process, the payout control program confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[14-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by lending a ball]
The payout control program reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU954a. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the payout control program is set to FIG. 229 ( As shown in d), in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the logic of the PRDY signal is set as HI, that is, the payout control MPU954a of the payout control unit 954 is started and held. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H0).

In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360, the ball lending sensor 365b is switched on (ON), and this ball lending operation signal is used as TDS. It is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

The CR unit 6 into which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, so that the CR unit uses BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal. It is output from No. 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU954a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU954a.

Under the control of the payout control MPU954a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program starts from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) in the present embodiment) as shown in FIG. 229 (b). By the time (set to 58 ms) elapses, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 25 balls) is paid out from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 in one payout operation. It monitors whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, is started.

Of the 200 yen worth of game balls, the CR unit 6 first pays out 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. Therefore, FIG. 229 (b) ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU954a.

In the payout control MPU954a, as shown in FIG. 229 (c) wm, when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (the present embodiment). Then, it is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to convey that one payout operation has started by the time, the logic of the EXS signal is set as HI, that is, the payout is held in the started state. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU954a, and is output as an EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 229 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the XS is input is set to 20 ms to 58 ms from the timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, it is set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses. The BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 229 (c), the payout control MPU954a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Go and pay out the predetermined number of balls to be rented, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the XS signal that is started up and held from the timing H3 is held as LOW, that is, in the downed state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, so FIG. 229 (b) ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate by the time when the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H5. It is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU954a) via the 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU954a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 229 (c). , The logic of the XS signal that has been started up and held is held as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and as XS, the game ball rental device connection terminal. Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU954a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are processed when the power of the payout control unit is turned on. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in (payout control unit main process).

In addition, the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is flat, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW. That is, when the signal is lowered and held), the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW. That is, the payout control program is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is sent to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Output (timing H9).

On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the payout control program maintains the logical state of the EXS signal. , Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a. The payout control program outputs to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. "Maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained, and the logical value of the EXS signal is HI. At some point (holding the XS signal up) is to maintain its logical HI.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control program (payout control MPU954a). This CR unit 6 uses the number of game balls for an amount of 200 yen as the number of balls for the amount of 100 yen, and by performing the payout operation of 25 balls for an amount of 100 yen twice, the game balls for which the number of rented balls is 50 are placed on the upper plate 301 or Pay out to the lower plate 302.

A clerk in the hall or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for an amount of 100 yen is used as the number of rented balls on the upper plate 301 or the bottom. When it is set to pay out to the plate 302, the payout control MPU954a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for an amount of 100 yen once, and the number of game balls for an amount of 500 yen is used as the number of balls to be rented. When it is set to pay out to 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control program performs the payout operation of 25 balls for an amount of 100 yen five times, while lending the number of game balls for an amount of 1000 yen. If the number is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout operation of 25 balls for an amount of 100 yen will be performed 10 times.

[10-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
In the payout control program, the CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869 even after the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Even if the signal is not started or the above-mentioned rental instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 sends the BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the payout control board 951 Output to. Even if the signal of the CR unit 6 is not shut down or the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE elapses, the CR unit 6 transmits the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And output to the payout control board 951. The CR unit 6 does not start the signal, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 performs BRDY, and the CR unit 6 rents a game ball or the like. Is output to the payout control board 951 via. When the signal is not shut down, the CR unit 6 uses the above-mentioned PRDY and EXS to confirm whether or not the BRQ and BRDY are normal.

Specifically, when the payout control program determines that the BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), after the lapse of a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from this timing J0. , The logic of the PRDY signal is set as LOW, that is, it is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and as PRDY, it is CR via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. It is output to the unit 6, and the logic of the EXS signal is set as LOW, that is, it is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output as EXS as the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Is output to the CR unit 6 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control program transfers the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J1 after the elapse of the predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, by HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing). J2).

Subsequently, the payout control program LOWs the logic of the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of the predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2. That is, it is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing). J3).

Subsequently, the payout control program transfers the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J3 after the elapse of the predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing). J4).

Subsequently, the payout control program LOWs the logic of the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of the predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing). J5).

Subsequently, the payout control program transfers the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J5 after the elapse of the predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5, by HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU954a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing). J6).

The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process).

[11. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 234. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 232 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing.

The peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1530, a liquid crystal display, and a sound control unit 1540. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1530 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, any one of a plurality of decorative symbol variation patterns can appear by acquiring game information such as a jackpot determination result from the main control board 1310 and referring to the game information. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear a variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. It executes control to operate the movable member. In the decorative symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed for the variation time of the special symbol, and when a special symbol combination appears as a result of the variable display, it is suggested that the jackpot is won.

[11-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[11-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 230. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 230. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1530a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1530a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1530a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1530a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1530a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1530a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to game effect control output from the main control board 1310 are output. It is in a state where various commands such as commands related to the state of the game machine 1 can be received. Further, in the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1530a itself, the peripheral control MPU1530a initializes the built-in VRAM by having the sound source built-in VDP1540a write, for example, "0" to the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1530c is compared with the effect backup information (1fr) that is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area. The production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), is compared, and the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area. A certain production backup information (1fr) is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared, and when the compared contents match, the surroundings are compared. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the control RAM 1530c, and Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms). The stored backup information (1 ms) and the production backup information (1 ms) are copied back to each other for hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, they do not match), the peripheral control RAM 1530c A value of 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to obtain a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is also compared with the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1530d (see FIG. 20). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c (see FIG. 20) to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e (see FIG. 19) so that the peripheral control MPU1530a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the effect control program acquires calendar information for specifying the date from the RTC built-in RAM of RTC15654a of the RTC control unit 1565, while acquiring time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. Further, the effect control program sets the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit and sets the current time information in the time information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

As described above, it is said that the peripheral control MPU1530a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC1565a when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e after performing the above-mentioned current time information acquisition processing, so that the peripheral control MPU1530a is not reset.

In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600 is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, and becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. In addition, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. It includes the brightness of the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed.

The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1530a can be accepted is input from the VDP1540a. The value 1 is set in the blank signal interrupt processing.

In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1530a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1.

By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1530a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are displayed in the transmission data storage area on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is in a state of being created and set by the lamp data creation process described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game is stored in the start address of the transmission data storage area on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the board-side emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. And write.

As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac has a transmission data storage area on the lamp drive board side when the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa is not using the bus when a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated. The remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in is sent byte by byte, via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai, and the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. By transferring and writing to, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and transmits it in synchronization with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. One-byte data of the shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

When the continuous transmission of the frame decorative drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, a plurality of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are stored in the frame decorative drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the LED of the LED is created and set by the lamp data creation process described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the O port and write.

As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1530aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is divided into 1 byte each, the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1530ai, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is subjected to this written transmission. The data in the buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I Continuous transmission is performed via the / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first decorative surface unit 532 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the third decorative rotating body unit 530B. And various information acquired from the posture mode of the second decorative surface portion 533 and the operation of the operation button 410 (for example, the first decorative surface portion 532 created based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530. And, based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in which the posture mode of the second decorative surface portion 533 and the operation history information of the operation button 410 are set, the posture mode and the operation presence / absence of the operation button 410 are monitored. Then, it is appropriately determined whether or not the posture mode and the operation state of the operation button 410 are reflected in the game production.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP1540a displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP1540a in the display data creation process described later from the channels CH1 and 2 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. Output to the frame side effect display device 460A.

As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of VDP1540a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device. Cancel the output to 460A.

As a result, delay in processing time can be prevented, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and A production by a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and a production by a pair of upper speakers 573 and a pair of lower speakers 921 by sound data output processing described later, and a production by BGM, sound effects, etc. according to various effects. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization of.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the sound data such as the BGM and sound effects set in the VDP1540a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC1540c as serialized audio data, or the BGM and In addition to the sound effect sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 1540c as serialized audio data.

When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1540a is input, the audio data transmission IC 1540c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data of the door frame relay board 911 (and, if necessary). The data is transmitted toward the door frame left side decorative board 160), and the left audio data is sent to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. And send. As a result, BGM, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

For example, in the scheduler update process, which of the screen data arranged in the time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, the number of screen data from the first screen data is output to VDP1540a. Update the pointer to indicate.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, the light emission data from the first light emission data is the light emission mode of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate if.

In the scheduler update process, sounds that indicate sound data such as BGM and sound effects, and sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in a time series that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the VDP1540a from the first sound command data among the command data.

In the scheduler update process, what is the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area? Update the pointer to indicate whether to output the third drive data. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing.

That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means).

That is, in the effect control program, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols (0 to 4). ), A symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of pending starts changes, and a game ball is accepted in the grand prize opening 2103. The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is (command analysis means) and recognizes which game state it is currently in.

In this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command, or the door frame close command. Analyze whether or not it is.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. In the reception command analysis processing, the effect control program is used. Analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area.

Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and so on. Various commands classified as related to synchronized production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, the above-mentioned door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command and main body There are various commands classified into status display such as frame closing command, error release navigation command, and frame status 1 command, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, the effect control program further executes various abnormality notifications when the commands analyzed in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification display as described above. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for this purpose, can be displayed in the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1530. It is extracted from various control data copy areas of the control RAM 1530c and set to 1530 cage in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. To do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into status displays. For example, in the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 1540 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side effect display device. 1600 (effect device), door side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) can be used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (effect device) can be used to aurally externally. Warn (error notification means).

In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs a main prize ball number information acquisition process (step S1025), and then performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026).

In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the calendar information and time stored in the calendar information storage unit. Updates the time information stored in the information storage unit.

By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be generated. It is created by extracting from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c of the unit 1530, set in the transmission data storage area on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. And set it in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in the peripheral control MPU1530a in chronological order as data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1530a, the VDP1540a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data, and sprite data from the extracted at least one character data. Is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1530a, the VDP1540a extracts sound data such as BGM and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b to control the built-in sound source, based on the sound command data. Then, after determining the playback channel to be used according to the sound control by the automatic channel method described later, playback is performed on the determined playback channel.

In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak is used to rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the resistance value in the above is converted into a value in 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023.

In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6.

The audio data transmission IC1540c is used as audio data in which the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above by controlling the liquid crystal and the VDP1540a of the sound control unit 1540 so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6. BGM and sound effects are reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 by outputting to.

The notification sound and the notification sound are played back without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume is programmed into the liquid crystal and the VDP1540a of the sound control part 1540. It can be controlled and adjusted.

Following step S1032 shown in FIG. 232, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and stores them in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. The contents are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1530c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the work area to be backed up, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed, Bank0 (1fr) is the backup target. ), The contents stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, the reception command storage area, the RTC information acquisition storage area, and the schedule data storage area. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies a certain effect information (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area at high speed as the effect backup information (1fr), and then Bank3 (Bunk3) in the backup second area. Peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies to 1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) at high speed.

A high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the first area of backup, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area, and specifies the copy to the beginning of Bank0 (1fr). Everything from the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the first area. make a copy.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area, and specifies the copy of Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored in the start address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area. Copy everything.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area, and specifies the copy to the beginning of Bank0 (1fr). Everything from the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank4 (1fr) in the second area. make a copy.

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is stored in the backup target Bank0 (SRAM) every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1530da, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the effect information (SRAM), which is the content of the data, to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area at high speed as the effect backup information (RAM), and then backs up the backup. Peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in two areas at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a stores in Bank0 (RAM) at the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac. Specify the copy of the contents to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (RAM) in the first area, and the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa responds to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac by Bank 0 (RAM). Specify the copy of the contents stored in to to Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to the Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area, and specifies the copy of the Bank 0 (SRAM). The contents stored in the start address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area. Copy everything.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area, and heads to Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the terminal address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank4 (SRAM) in the second area. make a copy.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e so that the peripheral control MPU1530a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later.

That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed.

The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1530a can be accepted is input from the VDP1540a. A value of 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[11-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 can be accepted is input from the liquid crystal and VDP 1540a of the sound control unit 1540. Part V Blank signal interrupt processing will be described.

When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether the flag SP-FLG during steady processing has a value of 0 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG sets a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on and reset processing is being executed, and performs peripheral control unit steady-state processing. The value is set to 0 when the execution is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. This is because when a V blank signal is input and a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the peripheral control power is turned on and the reset processing is performed in step S1008. Assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by the judgment, the purpose is to prevent the peripheral control unit steady processing that is currently being executed from being forcibly canceled in the middle and starting the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning. This is because it is done like this.

That is, when the peripheral control power is turned on and in step S1009 in the reset process (peripheral control unit steady process), the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. While transmitting to the control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 when the peripheral control power is turned on and in the reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that the execution has been completed, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing. That is, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this cycle, if the processing cannot be completed in a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 at the time of turning on the peripheral control power and in the reset processing. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input.

That is, the time for executing the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle in which the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 when the peripheral control power is turned on and in the reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). Although it is executed only 32 times for the peripheral control unit steady processing of 24 times, if the peripheral control unit steady processing of the current cycle that the above-mentioned processing is dropped exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is executed only 32 times.

That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[11-1--3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control power-on and the reset processing, will be described. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (the peripheral control unit 1530). Step S1100).

As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is the periphery of this routine in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 when the peripheral control power is turned on and in the peripheral control unit steady process of the reset process. Control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the peripheral control unit steady processing in the next cycle is executed after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing. By then, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times.

Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program directly performs this routine. To finish.

When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing.

After the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. When the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control power-on and the reset processing, and this routine is performed. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, an electric drive source set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c outside the peripheral control MPU 1530a. An electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in a time series constituting the schedule data. The effect control program drives an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data instructed by the pointer, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series. The pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c outside the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Of the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the motor based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and is set in the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first byte of the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the start address is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write.

As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac decorates the frame when the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa does not use the bus, triggered by each transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The remaining frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area for the drive amplifier board side motor is frame-decorated one byte at a time via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the drive amplifier board motor, the frame decoration serial I / O port for the drive amplifier board motor transfers the data of this written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transferred, and in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. ing.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, the motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Of the drive data of the electric drive source such as, etc., the game board for outputting the drive signal to the motor or the solenoid for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on the drive data instructed by the pointer. The side motor drive data SM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and is set in the transmission data storage area on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. ..

The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game is stored in the start address of the transmission data storage area on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. And write.

As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac has a transmission data storage area on the motor drive board side when the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa is not using the bus when a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated. The remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in is sent byte by byte to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer to register and write.

As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Byte data is transmitted bit by bit and continuously transmitted by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104 as described above, the effect control program performs the moving body information acquisition process under the control of the peripheral control MPU1530a (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches is created by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set in the movable body information acquisition storage area of. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106 as described above, the effect control program performs the operation unit information acquisition process under the control of the peripheral control MPU1530a (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation buttons) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the decorative rotating body unit 530 are input. The operation history information of 410 and the posture history information regarding the posture modes of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533) are created and set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area, the effect control program determines the posture mode (rotation direction, etc.) of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and whether or not the operation button 410 is operated. Can be obtained.

Further, in this operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108), as described above, the effect control program is one of the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display adjustment function, and the player-side light amount adjustment function described above. When the operation button 410 is operated while the adjustment function is operating, the operation history information of the operation button 410 is created as the history information of the detection signal output accordingly, and the operation unit information of the peripheral control RAM 1530c is created. The player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display adjustment function, and the player-side light intensity adjustment function are independently set in the acquisition storage area.

That is, each of the created operation history information is divided into the player side volume adjustment function, the player side display adjustment function, and the player side light amount adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated while the function is operating is written.

Based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area, the effect control program determines whether or not the operation button 410 is operated while the player-side volume adjustment function is operating (for example, whether or not there is a volume adjustment operation). Whether or not) can be grasped.

Subsequently, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d are backed up. Copy to one area and the second backup area to back up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1530c is backed up every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area, that is, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, motor drive board side transmission data storage area, movable body information acquisition storage area, and operation unit information acquisition storage area included in Bank0 (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the effect information (1 ms), which is the content of the data, to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area at high speed as the effect backup information (1 ms), and then backs up the backup. Peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) in two areas at high speed.

A high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ) From the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms) from the start address of Bank1 (1ms) in the backup first area in succession of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank2 (1ms) in the backup first area, and the beginning of Bank0 (1ms). Everything from the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms) is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank2 (1ms) in the first area. make a copy.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank3 (1ms) in the backup second area, and Bank0 (1ms). From the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), the contents are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area. Copy everything to.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area, and the beginning of Bank0 (1ms). From the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), all the contents are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank4 (1ms) in the second area. make a copy.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within the period of 1 ms.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing at the time of turning on the peripheral control power and in the reset processing, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. To start.

That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

As described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, and the periphery where the peripheral control MPU1530a and VDP1540a are mounted. Even in the production lot of the control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 triggers the main peripheral serial data to be built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a serial I / for the main control board. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer at the O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed.

In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1530a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204).

This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility. When the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, on the peripheral control unit 1530 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum). Value) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. ing. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the reception command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c (step S1216), and this routine is terminated.

This received command storage area is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

The peripheral control MPU1530a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[11-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. The peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds.

When 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1530a can operate even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. ..

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1530a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. stand by. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command storage area (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area are stored in the Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area as peripheral control DMA controllers. The 1530ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area.

A high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area. Specify the copy to the receive command storage area, and the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area in succession of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) in response to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area. Specify the copy to the area, from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr). All predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa receives the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in response to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, which is included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area. Specify the copy to the command storage area, from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr). Are continuously copied one by one by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area.

Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank 0 (1fr) in response to the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area. Specify the copy to the area, from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr). All predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e so that the peripheral control MPU1530a is not reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset, "0" is written to the storage area of the built-in VRAM described above to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1530a, and the peripheral control power is turned on and the reset process is restarted from the beginning. ..

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1530a is not reset.

On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT1530af and the peripheral control external WDT1530e are cleared. The output is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1530a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 of FIG. 232) which has already been described, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default each. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the empty channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). While each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1530a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. The details will be described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 235 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an omission of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 235 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 236 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, the volume output from the left and right speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 237 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 238 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 238 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 238 (C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 238 (A) to 238 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 238 (A), the game states are "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit" in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 238 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "first half notice A" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 235 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 238 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "full screen notice" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 235 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", so that the "full screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold prize sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. 239 (A) and 239 (B), respectively, show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 239 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an omission of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 239 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same priority than the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound when there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same.

FIG. 240 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, the identifier and priority for specifying the AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group in which a plurality of each sound exists is played. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. In this priority order, the larger the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), a BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is said. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined playback channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a hold winning sound) ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, the volume output from the left and right speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, for example, it can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", and in addition, "1" (0x1FF if 0xFF) is in the third byte. By setting), it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the game machine, and it is always played at the volume set by the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, for example, "0" is set for "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to "first half notice A sound effect" as this seek point, while "second half notice A sound effect" and "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 241 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 242 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 242 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 242 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" are sequentially arranged along the time axis which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, none of the playing sounds is overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other sounds are not overwritten. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, if a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure) is to be played and the hold prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The output of all other types of sounds continues without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "hold sound play" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 242 (A), for example, a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound has the highest priority of "25" as a new sound (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 242 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing is searched, and the playback channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels playing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sounds, the reserved winning sounds being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 243 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, required sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. It is used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 244 shows an example of a free channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In addition, in FIG. 244, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1100), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102), and if this automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, and if it exists. Determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

When a plurality of the corresponding channels exist, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114). On the other hand, when the corresponding channels do not exist but are one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116).

On the other hand, in step S1106 described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122).

On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that there is no free channel, it determines whether or not there is a new sound having the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if it exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the effect control program is described above when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described more visually and easily.

245 (A) and 245 (B) to 248 (A) and 248 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the production control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 245 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduces channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), the production control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and sets the playback channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

249 (A) and 249 (B) to 252 (A) and 252 (B) show specific examples of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reach BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 249 (B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the production control program then, as shown in FIG. 250 (A), triggers a playback request for the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10 to generate an empty channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and in FIG. 250 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 04 to 05 (playback channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15 (A). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a playback request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the free channel does not exist. Therefore, the use of the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played is stopped, and the playback channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. Reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of is played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the free channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also as many sounds as possible to be output can be produced by using each channel including the free channels. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

253 (A) and 253 (B) to 254 (A) and 254 (B) show specific examples of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 253 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 253 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the playback channels 00 to 01. Because there is, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

In addition, when the replacement playback of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound that was played before the replacement on the playback channel after the playback is completed. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

[12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the automatic channel method for sound control using all the playback channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned fixed channel sound control is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 255 (A) to 255 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by the two types of channel methods described above or a combination thereof, respectively.

FIG. 255 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 255 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 255 (C) shows an embodiment in which channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 255 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, and some playback channels are sound-controlled by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 255 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 255 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 262 and later.

In FIG. 255 (F), one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and some playback channels are sounded by the fixed channel method described above. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 255 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 268 and after.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[13. Game control processing]
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. 212. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the first and second starting port winning processes shown in FIG. 256. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 256. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 256. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during fluctuation shown in FIG. 256. The main control program executes the timer interrupt process every 4 ms, for example.

[13-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program first executes the first and second start port winning processes (step S6110). In this first / second start port winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 3112 and the game ball is accepted by the first start port 2002, or , The game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 3113, and it is determined whether or not the game ball is accepted by the second start port 2004.

Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and if this processing flag is 0, executes the fluctuation start processing (step S6130). When the processing flag is 0, for example, it means that the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information already stored in the start storage information storage area described above. In this fluctuation start processing, the main control program makes settings for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not the predetermined winning conditions are satisfied as a lottery for winning the big hit. After that, this processing flag is updated to 1.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this processing flag is 1, the main control program executes the variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern or stop symbol (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination or the current game state, etc. After determining and setting the jackpot symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2". In addition, this fluctuation pattern represents the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. ing.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). When this processing flag is 2, the following processing during fluctuation is executed (step S6180). In this variable processing, the main control program monitors the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S6150) by a timer, and when the time-out occurs, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second The variable display of the special symbol using the special symbol display 1405 is stopped.

After that, when the main control program determines in the above-mentioned fluctuation start process (step S6130) that the winning condition of the big hit game is satisfied in the big hit lottery and has won, the processing flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines in the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (step S6130) that the winning condition of the small hit game is satisfied in the big hit lottery and has won, the processing flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions are satisfied in the big hit lottery and the player has not won, the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, the main control program is re-executed from the fluctuation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). When the processing flag is 3, the main control program executes the jackpot game preparation process (step S6200).

In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and performs a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game, and the determined jackpot game. (For example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the processing flag is 4, the following jackpot game processing is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game process, one of the main control programs is set based on the number of rounds, the number of open times, the opening time, and the winning limit number of game balls as the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0.

Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and executes the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member in the first special game. At the same time, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member is regulated, while in the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member is executed and the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member is regulated.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following processing when a small hit is established is executed (S6240). In this small hit establishment process, the main control program sets the number of times of opening and the opening time in order to control the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member as a game mode of the small hit.

After that, the main control program closes after opening one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member once for a very short time, for example, as a small hit game mode based on the set number of times of opening and opening time. It is controlled to be in the state, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the variation start process (step S6130) is restarted. This small hit game is not a game that involves the operation of a condition device like a big hit game, but for example, it is a kind of big hit game and one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member is opened for a very short time. A game that is very similar to a game (so-called short-open jackpot game).

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect appearing on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation fluctuation pattern, a missed reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and a missed fluctuation fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. The effect display device 1600 is decorated after the reach effect. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 does not undergo the reach effect. , The effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally removed and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the game information, such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern can appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to making the effect display device 1600 appear a variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, a process of changing the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is performed. Alternatively, each effect sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played according to the progress of the effect display (variable pattern of decorative pattern, notice effect, movable body effect, button operation effect, etc.), or the movable member is operated. Take control.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hit establishment processing S6240 depending on whether or not the processing flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing shown in FIG. 256. You can choose between. That is, when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 5, the main control program can be playable including the small hit game, while when the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 4, the small hit game is not included. It can be playful.

As described above, since the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process include the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the processing flag like the small hit establishment process S6240. It is not supposed to be unused program code.

That is, even if the main control program does not execute the small hit establishment process S6240, it instead executes another branch process provided in parallel. With such a program configuration, the program code can be shared between models having different playability whether or not the small hit game is included. For example, different models depending on whether or not the small hit game is included. There is no need to develop each program code between them.

As described above, the main control program selectively executes any of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and then selectively executes the process. , This special symbol and special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[13-2. 1st and 2nd start opening winning process]
FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes (step S6110) shown in FIG. 256. The first and second starting port winning processes (step S6110) are processing related to determining whether or not the game ball has been accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the fact that the game ball has been accepted. Includes processing related to updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) on condition that is determined.

[13-3. Entering the game ball into the second starting port]
First, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113 (step S6201), and if it determines that the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113, the second start port sensor 3113. It is determined that the game ball has been accepted in 2004 (hereinafter, also referred to as "starting prize") (the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In step S6202, the main control program acquires various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) with this start winning as an opportunity.

In addition, this main control program takes the start winning as an opportunity to acquire the random number value for determining the jackpot game mode (for example, the random number value for determining the number of rounds) together with the random number for determining the jackpot, that is, the jackpot 2103. Before deciding the opening mode of the special symbol, the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol are first determined, and the game is advanced. Although details will be described later, this main control program has detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. Taking this as an opportunity, the random value for determining the jackpot game mode is acquired.

At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold count counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process, which will be described later.

First, in the second start hold storage process, the main control program acquires start storage information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for jackpot symbol, etc.) when the game ball is accepted at the second start port 2004. ) Is stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM) in the second start storage information storage area, which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the type of the special symbol and the holding order (step S6203).

That is, the main control program satisfies at least one start storage information indicating that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not yet satisfied for the second special symbol, and the start condition is satisfied for each type of special symbol. Up to a predetermined number are stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in a manner capable of specifying the order. Therefore, in the main control program, when the game ball is newly accepted in the second start port 2004, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of winning the start), even one second start memory information is stored in the second start memory information. If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start port winning command indicating that the game ball has been accepted in the second start port 2004 in the transmission information storage area, and sets the start port in the command transmission process described above. The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1510.

Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second start storage information is stored in the above-mentioned second start storage information storage area (that is, the number of second start storage information of the second special symbol is increased). As a result, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination conditions are satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means).

As the preceding determination condition, any or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area. It can be exemplified that the random number value stored in the combination is read out and the read random number value matches the pre-reading determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, "Advance judgment lottery").

When the read random number value matches the pre-reading determination value for the second special symbol, the main control program determines that the above-mentioned advance determination condition is satisfied, while the read random value is the second special symbol. If it does not match the pre-reading determination value, it is determined that the above-mentioned advance determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the preceding judgment command transmission processing described later when this preceding judgment condition is not satisfied, while the following preceding judgment command transmission processing is performed when this preceding judgment condition is satisfied. To execute.

In this advance determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command instructing that the advance determination effect should be started for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area, and has already described it. In the command transmission process of, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following look-ahead information in the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command.

Specifically, the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command is, for example, a special symbol 2 type look-ahead command, a special symbol 2 variable pattern look-ahead command, a special symbol 2 variable type look-ahead command, and a special symbol 2 variable distribution table information look-ahead command. , Or any of these, or a combination thereof, and includes read-ahead information described later. This look-ahead information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the information regarding the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

This special symbol 2 type look-ahead command includes information regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol types referred to here are, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, and a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating a loss. It is information indicating which one of. This special symbol 2 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command contains information about the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variable distribution table information look-ahead command includes the variable distribution table information of the second special symbol.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect control program that has received the above-mentioned special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command uses this special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command to perform the advance determination described later. The production can be executed.

In the present embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability fluctuation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period from the transition time (hereinafter, “preceding”). The notification that the above-mentioned preceding judgment condition is satisfied is suppressed over the "judgment suppression range") (preceding judgment suppressing means).

That is, the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability fluctuation state to the normal gaming state in this way, and then extends the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM to the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command over the preceding determination suppression range. It is restricted to write (preceding judgment instruction command). As a result, it is suppressed that the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process described above.

On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this hold history update process, the main control program sets a start condition corresponding to at least one start storage information stored in the first or second start storage information storage area in the lower special symbol storage display 1187. In a mode in which at least one of the first or second start storage information can be specified until the establishment, a hold display mode (for example, lighting, lighting, etc.) is displayed on the upper special symbol storage display 1184 or the lower special symbol storage display 1187. Blinking or extinguishing) is derived, and then the start condition corresponding to the preferential start storage information among the at least one first or second start storage information stored by the first or second start storage information storage means. With the establishment of, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the priority start storage information is stopped, and the priority start storage information is deleted from the first or second start storage information storage area (hold). Digestive control means).

[13-4. Entering the game ball into the first starting port]
On the other hand, if the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 3113 in step S6201, or if the value of the second hold count counter is 4, which is the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program. Determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3112 (step S6205).

When the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3112, the main control program determines that the game ball has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 (hereinafter, also referred to as "starting prize") (first special symbol). The start condition of (1) is satisfied), and the following step S6206 is executed. In step S6206, the main control program acquires various random numbers for the first special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) in the wake of this start winning, and the start storage information storage area described above. Of the above, the value of the number of first start storage information (corresponding to the above various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area (hereinafter, also referred to as "first hold number counter") is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. Make a judgment as to whether or not there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

In this first start hold storage process, the main control program specially obtains the start memory information (random value for jackpot determination, random number value for jackpot symbol, etc.) acquired when the game ball is accepted in the first start port 2002. It is stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM) in the first start storage information storage area, which is a part of the main control RAM, while being associated with the symbol type and the holding order (step S6207).

That is, the main control program displays at least one start storage information indicating that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not yet satisfied for the first special symbol in the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol. Is stored in the first start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, first start storage information storage means) up to a predetermined number in a manner capable of specifying. Therefore, in the main control program, when the game ball is newly accepted in the first start port 2002, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of winning the start), even one first start memory information is stored in the first start memory information. If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2002 in the transmission information storage area, and sets the starting opening winning command in the command transmission process described above. The command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1510. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the advance determination effect described later by using the start opening winning command.

Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first start storage information is stored in the above-mentioned first start storage information storage area (that is, the number of first start storage information of the first special symbol is increased). As a result, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination conditions are satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, for example, any one of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area, or It can be mentioned that the stored random number value is read out in any combination, and the read random number value matches the pre-reading determination value for the first special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as "advance judgment lottery").

By the way, as the above-mentioned advance determination process, the main control program executes the advance determination lottery based on the game information determined based on any of the predetermined random values as described above, and obtains the lottery result. , It is configured so that it can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a preceding determination instruction command (either a special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or a special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command) (pre-reading first stage determination).

When the read random number value matches the look-ahead determination value for the first special symbol, the main control program determines that the above-mentioned advance determination condition is satisfied, while the read random value is the first special symbol. If it does not match the pre-reading determination value, it is determined that the above-mentioned advance determination condition is not satisfied. This main control program does not execute the advance determination command transmission process described later when this advance determination condition is not satisfied, while the following advance determination command transmission is performed when this advance determination condition is satisfied. Execute the process.

In this advance determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command instructing that the advance determination effect should be started for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area, and has already described it. In the command transmission process of, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following look-ahead information in this special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command is, for example, a special symbol 1 type look-ahead command, a special symbol 1 variable pattern look-ahead command, a special symbol 1 variable type look-ahead command, and a special symbol 1 variable distribution table information look-ahead command. , Or any of these, or a combination thereof, and includes read-ahead information described later. This look-ahead information includes the symbol type, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

This special symbol 1 type look-ahead command includes information regarding the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol types referred to here are, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating a small hit, and a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating a loss. It is information indicating which one of. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command contains information about the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variable distribution table information look-ahead command includes the variable distribution table information of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect control program that has received the above-mentioned special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command uses this special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command to perform the advance determination described later. The production can be executed.

In this peripheral control board 1510, the expectation of a big hit indicates whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the look-ahead display effect based on the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command. Whether or not execution is possible is determined according to the ratio. The look-ahead effect is a continuous effect that spans multiple fluctuations, but whether or not to perform this look-ahead effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command sent at the start opening winning, and at that timing. At the same time as determining which display mode is to be used from a plurality of display modes of continuously performed effects, the display mode that changes over a plurality of fluctuations is also determined (scenario is determined in advance).

As a display mode, the effect is immediately started based on the result of the advance determination process, and the effect is made to wait for execution based on the result of the advance determination process, and the next variation is made. It can be exemplified that the continuous production is started at the start. Further, even when it is determined that such a continuous effect is to be started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change at all from the state before the continuous effect is started (for example, a normal display mode). , Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode).

Although such a continuous effect changes stepwise, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be the same as that of the display mode displayed next with respect to the previous display mode, or the display mode may be increased. May be good. Furthermore, the display mode in which the jackpot expectation is lowered may be executed. In that case, the expectation of the jackpot may actually be higher than the display mode in which the expectation gradually increases (that is, it corresponds to "breaking the law"). As the final form of the continuous notice, the information represented by the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command can be discriminated by the player, for example, jackpot confirmation, probability change confirmation (transition confirmation to the probability fluctuation state), ball output confirmation, etc. It may be the aspect of.

On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold count counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the start storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this hold history update process, until the main control program satisfies the start condition corresponding to at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area in the upper special symbol storage display 1184. The hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) is derived in such a manner that the at least one start storage information can be specified, and then the at least one start storage information stored by the start storage information storage area is obtained. When the start condition corresponding to the priority start storage information is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the priority start storage information should be stopped and the priority should be given from the start storage information storage area. Erase the start memory information (pending digestion control means).

On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 where the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value when the game ball is not accepted to the first start port 2002 in the step S6205 or in the process of the step S6206. If so, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

[13-5. Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 256.

In this fluctuation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two hold count counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). .. Here, the value of the hold number counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of the first start storage information (random value) stored in the first start storage information storage area among the above-mentioned start storage information storage areas. The value of the hold number counter of the second special symbol indicates the number of the second start storage information (random value) stored in the second start storage information storage area among the above-mentioned start storage information storage areas. ..

When the main control program determines in step S301 described above that the values of the hold count counters for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0, the start conditions for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both. After determining that it has not been established and ending the fluctuation start process and ending the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. It should be noted that the variation start process may be the same process as the advance determination process so that the same result can be obtained at the start of the variation and at the advance determination as the determination result, and the result may be used as the look-ahead effect command.

On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6301 that the values of the hold count counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not 0, the start condition is set for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is assumed that the start condition is not satisfied although it is satisfied, and it is judged that the start is in the so-called start pending state. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the hold number counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of the second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of the second start storage information is not 0, the main control program acquires the second start storage information (second special symbol random value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above. A predetermined number of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area are shifted and stored (step S6304).

Specifically, the second start storage information (random value) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area in which the main control program divides the second start storage information storage area into a plurality of parts. Is shifted to the n-1st storage area and stored. As a result, at least the storage area becomes vacant, and new start storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the vacant storage area.

At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation flag to "1" (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number counter of the second special symbol, that is, the number of the second start storage information (step). S6306). At the same time, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the lower special symbol storage display 1187 so as to represent the number of second start storage information after the subtraction (the number of reserved second special symbols). The special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is reset at the same time as, for example, when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6302 that the number of the second start storage information is 0, the main control program acquires the first start storage information (first special symbol random value) (step S6307), and then describes the above. A predetermined number of first start storage information stored in the first start storage information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6308).

Specifically, the first start storage information storage area and the second start storage information storage area are each provided with four storage areas (first to fourth sections). In each of these storage areas, a random number storage area for jackpot determination in which a random number value for jackpot determination is stored, a random number storage area for jackpot symbol in which random number values for jackpot symbols are stored, and a random number value for reach determination are stored. A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and random number 1 and 2 storage areas for fluctuation patterns in which the variation display pattern random number values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, respectively, are provided.

The main control program divides the first start storage information storage area into a plurality of nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) and stores the second start storage information (random number value) in the n-1th. Shift to the storage area of and store it. As a result, at least the storage area becomes vacant, and new start storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the vacant storage area.

At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation flag to "2" (step S6309), and subtracts "1" from the value of the hold number counter of the first special symbol, that is, the number of the second start storage information. (Step S6310). At the same time, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the upper special symbol storage display 1184 so as to represent the number of first start storage information after the subtraction (the number of reserved first special symbols). The special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

As described above, although the judgment at the start of fluctuation is performed in the same judgment process as the look-ahead, the information judged by the look-ahead is the same again without using all or part of the information. By repeating and executing the process, it is possible to obtain the same result as at the time of pre-reading determination. Even if the same process is executed at the start winning prize and at the start of the fluctuation to determine the game information, the pre-reading command (special symbol memory pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of the fluctuation are different from each other. The command values are not the same so that they can be distinguished from each other.

Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the jackpot determination table when the probability fluctuation function is not activated, which is set so that the probability of becoming a jackpot is low (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state, the main control program selects the probability fluctuation function operation time determination table set with a high probability of becoming a big hit (step S6314).

Next, in the main control program, the first special symbol random value or the second special symbol random value (hereinafter, also referred to as “big hit determination random value”) acquired in step S6303 or step S6307 is a big hit based on the selected table. It is determined whether or not the value (random value corresponding to the jackpot) is matched (step S6315).

That is, after the start condition is satisfied, the main control program determines whether or not the predetermined winning condition is satisfied (lottery means). If it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is a jackpot of the jackpot type based on the jackpot determination random value, that is, the type that operates at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (state type related to the game state). It is determined whether or not (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the jackpot flag according to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317).

On the other hand, when the jackpot determination random number value acquired in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[13-6. Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the jackpot flags is ON, the main control program executes the jackpot variation pattern table setting process (step S6402).

In this jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process, a fluctuation pattern table for making a jackpot (a jackpot fluctuation pattern table as a winning fluctuation pattern table) is set, and if the winning conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation for making a jackpot Determine the pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) (variation pattern setting means).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6401 that the jackpot flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means, and is stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the start condition is satisfied. Reach condition or this reach as a condition for executing a production (reach effect) that implies that a predetermined winning condition may be satisfied, that is, a special lottery may be won for the stored information. It is determined whether or not a specific reach condition is satisfied among the conditions (step S6403).

In addition, the reach condition referred to here is a reach production in a normal mode in which it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied and it is easy for the player to have a relatively weak expectation that he / she has won the special lottery. Normal reach as an example, and a specific form of reach production that makes it easier for players to have a relatively strong expectation that they have won the special lottery because it is relatively likely that the winning conditions have been met. It is a condition for any of the super reach as an example to be executed. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such a determination is also referred to as a "reach lottery".

By the way, in the main control program, the winning probability of such a reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter, referred to as "the winning probability of the reach lottery") is stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is controlled to change step by step according to the number of completed start storage information. Specifically, the main control program determines the winning probability of the reach lottery according to the number of stored start storage information (so-called hold number), for example, 1/15 when it is 0, and 1 when it is 0. Is controlled to be 1/14, 1/13 when the number is 2, 1/10 when the number is 3, and 1/10 when the number is 4.

Further, the main control program writes the reach lottery result command including the result of the above-mentioned reach lottery into the transmission information storage area of the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM, and transmits the command transmission process (random number range information control means). ). That is, instead of transmitting the determination reach random value itself described above to the peripheral control board 1510, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, a reach lottery result command regarding the result of the reach lottery is transmitted.

The reach lottery result command is the first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information related to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the start memory information related to the second special symbol. Is a command name that collectively refers to.

When it is determined that the above-mentioned reach condition is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the main control program executes the reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In this reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a fluctuation pattern table (reach loss fluctuation pattern table) for executing the reach effect to make a loss.

At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time saving function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning conditions are not satisfied as described above and the time saving function is operating (time saving time), the fluctuation for executing the above-mentioned reach effect and making a loss. A fluctuation pattern table (time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table as a time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a pattern (time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time saving function is not operating (non-time saving time), the main control program executes the above-mentioned reach effect and loses. A variation pattern table (non-time saving non-winning variation pattern table as a non-time saving non-winning variation pattern table) including a variation pattern (non-time saving non-winning variation pattern) is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the time-saving time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table and the non-time-saving time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table are collectively referred to as "reach loss fluctuation pattern table".

In the present embodiment, the main control program operates not only "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" as the lottery result of the lottery due to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and further, this "loss" activates the time saving function. It is necessary to separately control whether it is a "non-time saving time loss" as a "loss" in a non-working state and a "time saving time loss" in a state where the time saving function is operating.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In this non-reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a fluctuation pattern table (non-reach loss fluctuation pattern table) to be lost without executing the reach effect. A plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation pattern tables are prepared in association with each other according to a plurality of gaming states. For example, in a normal gaming state, a table in which shortening fluctuations are likely to occur when the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. It has become.

Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not satisfied in this way, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time saving function is operating, and similarly, whether or not the time saving function is operating. The fluctuation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. That is, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time saving function is operating (time saving time), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A fluctuation pattern table (time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table as a time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time saving function is not operating (non-time saving time), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A fluctuation pattern table (non-time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table as a non-time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (non-time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern) is set (variation pattern setting means).

The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), and the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written in the transmission information storage area and set (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are also collectively referred to as "variable pattern commands". The pattern command of this fluctuation pattern includes information on the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes the winning result regarding the jackpot.

Further, the main control program sets the value of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, the main control program has a jackpot fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern table. Is set in the timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the small hit fluctuation pattern table, the main control program has a small hit according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the small hit fluctuation pattern table. Set the variable time for the timer.

When the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table, the main control program reduces the time according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table. Set the reach fluctuation time in the timer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is the non-time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table, the main control program responds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the non-time-saving reach loss fluctuation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-short time reach is set in the timer. In this way, even if the lottery result of the special lottery is "missing", the fluctuation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time saving function is activated.

Here, the main control program manages the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of such a special symbol with 2-byte data, and sets the maximum fluctuation time which is the total value of these times. 262.144s (65536 × 4ms) × 2 = 524.288s, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which is twice as long as the conventional one, in which each of these times is managed by 1 byte, is realized.

When the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program then sets the special figure 250ED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special figure 250ED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol change flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, triggered by the establishment of the start condition. At least one of the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means) is started to display a variation consisting of a plurality of LED lighting patterns according to a determined variation pattern. (Design fluctuation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414), and ends the fluctuation pattern setting processing as described above.

When set in the variation pattern setting process in this way, the main control program executes the pattern command and the winning information command written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. It is read out and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1510.

[13-7. Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during fluctuation shown in FIG. 256.

First, the main control program determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up in step S6412 (see FIG. 259) described above (step S6501), and the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the processing during fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed up, the main control program sets the special figure 250ED operation flag set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program receives the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display) according to the special symbol fluctuation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above. By using at least one of the means), the variation display (variation of the special symbol) consisting of the variation pattern of the 7-segment LED lighting, extinguishing, or blinking mode is stopped, and the stop mode is determined according to the established conditions described above. A stop symbol consisting of is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means). That is, the main control program starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and then determines the winning condition when the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern elapses. A stop symbol according to the result is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means).

Next, the main control program writes and sets a fixed stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is completed and the predetermined stop symbol is fixed. The main control program reads the fixed stop command from the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variablely displayed has been confirmed.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S6504). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S6505) and ends the changing processing.

By the way, in a general game machine, when a game ball is accepted by a start port and a start condition is satisfied, if there is no start memory information (hereinafter, also referred to as a hold ball) for which the start condition has been satisfied before that. The variable display of the special symbol is started, and the stopped symbol is displayed when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed.

At the same time, in such a general game machine, after the start condition is satisfied, a special lottery is executed thereafter, and if the special lottery is won, the normal game state is changed to the special game state (already). (See first reference above). When the game state shifts in this way, for example, the game content associated with the reserved ball stored before the shift of the game state may be executed after the shift of the game state. It seems that there is a risk of giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the processing flag is updated to 3 as described above (that is, when the gaming state is changed, for example), it is confirmed that the main control program is changed to the next. After writing a command indicating the current gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "migration destination command") to the transmission information storage area, this main control program then sends this migration destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92). Send to.

As will be described later, the main control program keeps the gaming state in the normal gaming state if the winning condition is not satisfied, but if the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is changed to the established winning condition. It shifts to an advantageous gaming state, and then shifts to return to the normal gaming state (game state control means).

Therefore, the main control program transmits a transfer destination command indicating that the game state has been shifted to the predetermined game state to the peripheral control board 1510 (post-shift game state notification means). .. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, the transferred game state is taken into consideration based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 1310, and the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in the game state before and after the transfer. Control the production operation.

Normally, in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU 1530a normally executes the effect operation without any particular restriction from the main control board 1310 when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

As a first example for making the mode so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player, when the peripheral control MPU1530a receives the migration destination command from the main control board 1310, the gaming state is shifted based on the migration destination command. Since it can be surely grasped, the execution of the above-mentioned advance determination effect, reach effect, and other effect operations is regulated by the control of the main control board 1310 side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

On the other hand, as a second example in which the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is based on the migration destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, a start condition. When the game state at the first time when the start condition is satisfied is different from the game state at the second time when the start condition is satisfied, the effect operation is performed in consideration of the transferred game state. It may be controlled.

In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the transfer destination command later, when the game state is changed, the peripheral control MPU 1530a can immediately grasp that the game state has been changed, so that the transition is made. It becomes possible to control the production operation so that the game content linked to the game state does not cause a sense of discomfort for the player.

When the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives a migration destination command from the main control board 1310 and determines, for example, that the next game state is a probability change state or a time saving state, a predetermined winning condition regarding the stored start memory information of the destination is determined. If is established but the winning species does not activate the probability fluctuation function (so-called normal jackpot), the above-mentioned advance judgment effect is performed for the next and subsequent start memory information stored following the start memory information of the destination. It may be regulated not to be executed.

By the way, the state in which the processing flag is 3 indicates that the processing stage is in the process stage in which the variable display of the special symbol is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value in the situation identification flag for identifying the game state in the jackpot game preparation process, which will be described later, together with the process of updating the process flag in step S6505 to 3.

The main control program was established by using the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means) according to the special symbol that was variablely displayed as described above. The stop symbol according to the winning condition is displayed (stop symbol control means).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6504 that the jackpot flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508), and ends the changing processing. In this case, since the main control program does not involve the transition of the gaming state, the writing of the migration destination command to the transmission information storage area is restricted. It should be noted that the fact that this processing flag is 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has not been won.

[13-8. Big hit preparation process]
As described above, in the jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and performs a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game, and this determination. The mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game is set, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Then, the effect control program updates the processing flag to 4, sets the situation identification flag to 0, returns it to the initial value, and ends the jackpot game preparation process.

[13-9. Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

In the jackpot game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the jackpot 2103 is open (step S6801). When the large winning opening 2103 is open, the main control program determines whether or not the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2103 has reached the opening / closing operation time limit set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). When it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed, the main control program closes the large winning opening 2103 by closing the opening / closing member (step S6804).

However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet elapsed, the main control program will move to the large winning opening 2103 after the large winning opening 2103 is opened. When the number of game balls entered is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the large winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set in step S6802 has not yet passed and the number of game balls accepted in the grand prize opening 2103 in step S6803 has not yet reached the upper limit, the main control program is set. , The big hit game process is finished while keeping the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the large winning opening 2103 is not open, the main control program sets the number of times the large winning openings 2105 and 2106 are opened (the number of round games) by the opening / closing member in step S6803. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S805). When the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program operates the opening / closing member according to the winning conditions established as described above, opens the corresponding big winning openings 2103 (step S6806), and performs the big hit game process. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program determines that the winning condition is satisfied by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state shifts to the state of restricting the execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member executed as a condition.

That is, in this case, the main control program stores in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) separately from the jackpot flag in, for example, step S6317 (see FIG. 258) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. Based on the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the jackpot flag and the jackpot game in-game flag to the OFF state (step S6807). , The winning species of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

Here, in step S6808, it is determined whether or not the main control program is a winning type (for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9 for the jackpot symbol) that activates the probability variation function. That is, whether or not this main control program satisfies the probability variation transition condition for determining whether or not the game state (probability fluctuation state) in which the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than that in the normal game state is satisfied. (Winning probability control means).

When this probabilistic transition condition is satisfied, the main control program puts the transition destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating the game state in which the transition is confirmed to be next. Write. On the other hand, when this probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the main control program shifts to a gaming state other than the probability fluctuation state (winning probability control means), and also shifts to a gaming state that is determined to shift to the next. The migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area as a representative command. After that, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92).

That is, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is not the winning type that operates the probability variation function, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without operating either the probability variation function or the time saving function (step). S6811).

On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning species (so-called probability variation jackpot) that activates the probability variation function, the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not the probability variation transition condition for determining whether or not the probability fluctuation state in which the above-mentioned winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state is satisfied. , When the above probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to the probability fluctuation state set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined variation display number. While this probability fluctuation state is continued while the fluctuation is displayed, when the above probability change transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state (winning probability control means).

Next, the main control program activates the time saving function (step S6810) and then stops the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time saving function is activated, the main control program selects each time saving time fluctuation pattern table including the fluctuation pattern group in which the fluctuation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the number of fluctuations of the predetermined special symbol. The value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set in the timer shorter than the value of the specified fluctuation time according to the length of the fluctuation pattern determined from each time reduction time fluctuation pattern table (time reduction function control means). ..

This main control program writes the migration destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command indicating the game state in which the transition is confirmed next, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92). You may do so.

At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second starting port 2004 according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern until the number of fluctuations of the predetermined special symbol is reached. , The game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is easily accepted by the second starting port 2004. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812) and ends the jackpot game processing.

As described above, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the big winning opening 2103 according to the opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds predetermined in step 805 is reached, and the big winning opening 2103 is opened. In the state, the prize ball operation is instructed according to the number of game balls accepted by the large prize opening 2103.

Here, in a general game machine, a game ball launched in the game area flows down between a large number of nails provided in the game area, and a part of them enters the start port or the general start port. On the other hand, the remaining game balls are discharged out of the game area from the discharge port (so-called out port) formed at the bottom of the game area, but in such a game machine, at first glance, they are provided in the game area. It is also conceivable that the circulation of the game ball may not be in the proper state as it should be, depending on the arrangement of the accessory and the nail.

However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the above winning conditions are satisfied, the main control program switches at least one of the determined first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means). After controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern determined as described above (the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning), the winning condition is triggered by the elapse of the fluctuation time at the time of winning according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning. The stop symbol corresponding to is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means).

Next, in the main control program, when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time saving function is activated, the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display determined above are activated. After controlling the variation display of the special symbol according to the above-determined time-saving non-winning fluctuation pattern using at least one of 1405 (variable display means), the fluctuation time according to this time-saving non-winning fluctuation pattern (time-saving non-winning time) When the elapse of the fluctuation time), the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means).

Next, in the main control program, when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time saving function is not activated, the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display determined above are determined. After controlling the variation display of the special symbol according to the determined non-time saving non-winning variation pattern using at least one of 1405 (variable display means), the variation time (non-time saving) according to this non-time saving non-winning variation pattern. The stop symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the (variation time at the time of non-winning) has elapsed.

[14. Advance judgment processing]
The above-mentioned effect control program analyzes the command received from the main control board 1310 in the reception command analysis process described above and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (command receiving means), and the command is a special symbol 1 storage command. Alternatively, if it is a special symbol 2 storage command, a start hold display mode that implies a lottery result of a special lottery for new start storage information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command, triggered by the reception of this command. Is led out to the game board side effect display device 1600 (display means) (start hold control means).

That is, in this effect control program, if the received command is a special symbol memory look-ahead effect command (special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command or special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command), the look-ahead included in the special symbol memory look-ahead effect command. Based on the information (for example, exemplifying the information about the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, information suggesting the type of the jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command or the special symbol 2 is obtained. The game board side effect display device 1600 is made to derive a start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start memory information corresponding to the memory look-ahead effect command, and then corresponds to the new start memory information. When the fluctuation time is elapsed, the derivation of the start hold display mode is terminated (start hold control means).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is received, the effect control program performs the above-mentioned start hold display mode (for example, as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to hold expectations for a big hit, "normally". The "hold display mode" is exemplified) from the beginning or in the middle of the above derivation. The "super hot hold display mode" is exemplified as a hold display mode that makes it very easy for the player to have an expectation for a big hit. ) Is replaced with, and the advance determination control is executed to be derived to the game board side effect display device 1600 (advance determination control means).

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the sound control method described above will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, the sound assignment to each channel is dynamically changed so that many sounds can be reproduced by effectively utilizing the empty channels, but the production of the game is In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a duplicate notice effect or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically allocating the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound by type.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the production sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the effect data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 255 (C) and 255 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel system are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. In addition, the channels that reproduce the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 262.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 262.

As shown in FIG. 262, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 is "AUTO group 1", and the channel of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 is "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the game machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also the sound quality of the BGM is improved by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the game machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played back. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the game machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the notice production, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the advance notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound when the advance notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU1530a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, free channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a free channel, the sound specified from the free channel is set to be output. On the other hand, when there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound output with priority when a big hit is confirmed. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the game machine. In this way, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the game machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to reliably output like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the free channel search process in the case of executing the control for outputting the sound of the present embodiment. FIG. 244 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 263 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 263, in the processes of steps S1108 and S1120, when the new sound is an automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not there are free channels in the same group of channels. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108 and step S1120 is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 263, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, the selection conditions of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 264. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting the new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound having a higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the playback time of the sound at the time of channel selection. Includes remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 244, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire effect. For example, a production with a long playback time can have a high degree of expectation, so a production with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total playback time set in advance, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

The conditions 1 and 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect with respect to the total time of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel having a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player recognizes that the effect is newly executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speaker can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, assuming that a production that outputs a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher degree of expectation, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of free channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the number of free channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

The table shown in FIG. 264 shows the conditions 1 to 8 as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 265 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 265, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 266, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is increased based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is played when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, it is not necessary to lower the volume, and even if the sound effects output at the same time are small. You do not have to lower the volume. In addition, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B effect sound effects muted from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being played on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the effect data related to the effect sound effect. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the advance notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the advance notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a production sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while exchanging the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. ..

Further, the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and it is desirable that the effect is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to the hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. it can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 1, so the output of the effect sound effect is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority effect sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing a highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and the channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for vacant channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds with high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output like BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify a game machine failure or fraudulent activity. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of sound, each channel can be effectively used, and further, appropriate control can be performed according to the sound output status. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, the sound may be output to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state, and in the control of outputting an alarm sound, the designated channel is not searched for an empty channel. The sound may be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to preferentially output the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, the effect being executed can be continued while being lowered without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume as long as the previously executed low-priority effect continues even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect independently, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels that can be assigned. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modified example of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 268 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 262. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 269 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 262, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 269 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 269 (B). Specifically, fixed channel type channels for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels that have adopted the automatic channel type assigned to AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGM is ended. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the game machine is selected and the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 270 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 270, when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 269 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 269 (B). )) Is changed to. After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 268, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 269 (B)). At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when a scene for continuing the production is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 270, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the jackpot state, the time saving state, or the background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 255 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 255 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, it becomes possible to make more notification sounds, BGM or sound effects reproducible depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example of grouping channels and managing the output sounds by associating them with each group has been described. In addition, when the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group was explained. Here, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a case where control such as changing the volume of the sound being output by another channel is performed will be described.

After the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound effect by the predetermined sound effect and the sound output by the playing BGM or other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. A typical effect of performing such control is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is canceled and the output of the sound by BGM or another effect is resumed, so that the newly output sound (the sound concerned). It is possible to draw the player's attention by highlighting the effect including the output of the above, and to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel on which the sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In the present embodiment, the channels are grouped and the priority is set for each group. Then, when the sound is output on the channel belonging to the low priority group, the case where the sound is newly output on the channel belonging to the high priority group will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 271 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is divided into a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

A group volume priority and a suppressed volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of another sound being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced in a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, control is performed so that other sounds being played are muted. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Further, when each set value is described with reference to FIG. 271, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed in the present embodiment as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, sounds such as notification sounds and BGM that are preferentially output or are always output are assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of the effect are assigned.

In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all the other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the amusement park as shown as a reference reproduction sound. Specifically, a magnetic abnormality is detected. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed channel 1, since the occurrence of fraudulent activity or failure is a factor, the output of the effect sound effect or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest in FIG. 271. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound effect that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently.

Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in the reference reproduced sound. The jackpot confirmation sound is a sound that notifies that the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot at a predetermined timing such as when the start prize is won, and is a production sound effect that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been confirmed that the game has transitioned to a high probability state, and like the jackpot confirmation sound, the expectation of the player is greatly improved. Can be made to.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-mentioned blackout effect is executed and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display on the effect screen is also dimmed. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting the state in which the sound effect by another effect is not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout sound effect is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half variation. It may be.

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the sound being reproduced in the group having the priority "4" or less is halved (50%). It is suppressed by the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO Group 2 include, for example, a first half warning sound effect and a second half warning sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50" as in the case of the AUTO group 2, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority of "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the warning sound effect is output from AUTO group 2, the volume of the warning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the initial volume). You may.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning opening, a holding winning sound is output even while the blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of the present embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 230, step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1530a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processes after step S1420 are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1530a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "Yes"), and the volume control table for each channel group. From (FIG. 271), the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1406 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, when control is performed for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1530a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1530a has the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound having the highest priority during current playback are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1406). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processes after step S1410.

Explaining the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1530a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in step S1410 or later, if a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being played is registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a is a new playback request. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU1530a requests new playback. The volume of the sound is reduced based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1414).

If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is ">"), the peripheral control MPU1530a newly plays. The work area is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU1530a is set to the work area. While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU1530a has the suppression volume value and the group volume priority work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

When the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this process is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1423, step S1424), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, sound volume control will be described in chronological order. FIG. 273 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 273 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 273 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 273 describes an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed channel 2). As shown in FIG. 271, the fixed ch2 has a group volume priority of "4" and a suppressed volume value of "-1". Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of the hold winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The production sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is "No"). .. Since the parameter was not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, normally BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is). "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is "="), the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set in advance. The specified volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being played and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is based on the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of BGM is usually reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority of the normal BGM and the effect sound effect of the first half notice A during playback is lower than that of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these The volume of the sound effect of (step S1416) is reduced. In the blackout effect, the sound is muted because the suppression volume value is 0.

Further, the second half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until is finished.

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and the parameters are output at a predetermined volume. Therefore, the hold winning sound is output as usual even during the execution of the blackout effect.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the sound output of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the sound effect having a high group priority is output, the output of the sound effect having a low group priority can be suppressed to make a specific effect stand out. Furthermore, by volume control by the suppression volume value, the player can be made to recognize that multiple effects are progressing at the same time, and the group of effect sound effects that greatly increase the player's expectation, such as the jackpot confirmation sound. By setting the priority order high, it is possible to execute the sound effect without impairing the effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound effect during reproduction is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. Was controlled to decrease, but from the timing when the sound with high priority is output, the volume of other production sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. May be good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being played), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or up to the target value based on the production content such as the length of the playback time of the effect sound effect. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new production sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the production sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new production sound effect is relatively long, the target. It is also possible to set a long time to reach the value to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a jackpot confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the production sound effect during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output production sound effect stand out more without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound effect ends and the output of the other effect sound effect is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is played, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (the volume currently being played. Here. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the player while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the effect sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of the alarm sound and the notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to cheating), not only a production sound effect but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority) (for example, For example, the output of the ball jam notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is interrupted. Sound) may be given priority for output.

Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to have a sound output time like the effect sound effect, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or notification is eliminated. Therefore, when multiple types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, other notification sounds are output. .. At this time, the sound having the next highest priority may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
The control of the sound that is output in duplicate according to the priority between the groups has been explained above. Next, a control example for controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 274 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect that shows volume control for each total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in the present embodiment. The playback channel (ch) used, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 271, the used reproduction channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set for the total playback time, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so as not to be suppressed.

When 0 is set for the total playback time, the loop playback is repeated and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total playback time is a number other than this (positive number), it is the playback time of the sound effect. The unit of total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect of changing the volume of other sound effects output at the same time, as in the example shown in FIG. 271. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played is continued as it is without changing the sound being played, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being played (in the total playing time- Suppress (mute) the output of (excluding the sound effect for which 1 is set). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In the present embodiment as well, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed as in the above-described embodiment, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 274, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are played, other sound effects being played are set. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the game hall, and is a sound effect that is output because it is caused by a fraudulent act or a failure. The volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

Since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects are designed so that they do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is set for each sound effect (playback time), and the suppression volume value is set to "0", so the notification sound output from the fixed ch1. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in FIG. 271.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to a value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50", so that in AUTO group 2. When a sound is reproduced, the output of all other sounds being reproduced is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, as specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2, which can halve the output of BGM and make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Specific sounds output by the AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and pressing the effect button. It is a button press sound to notify.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effects to be reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIGS. 275A and 275B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1530a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1501 is "No"), the processes after step S1530 are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1530a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1501 is "Yes"), and the volume for each sound effect. The suppression volume value and the total playback time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 274) (step S1502).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “-1” (no suppression control) (step S1503). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503 is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1506 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503 is "No"), that is, when controlling the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1530a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1506 are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1504 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1530a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1506). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processes after step S1510.

Explaining the sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound, the peripheral control MPU1530a first determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is "-1". (Step S1510). When the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is "-1" (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new sound is output. Suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of other sound effects during reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

The peripheral control MPU1530a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511). Further, the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time for which a new playback request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512).

Then, the peripheral control MPU1530a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513). When the volume of all the sound effects during reproduction is suppressed, the processes after step S1530 are executed (step S1514).

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (the result of step S1510 is "No"), the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1". It is determined whether or not "-1" or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1530 are executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1530a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a determines the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time (step S1522).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is "No"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made. Is set to a reduced volume value based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1525).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526). Then, when the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527).

When the peripheral control MPU1530a performs the processes of steps S1526 and S1527 for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1530a executes the processes after step S1530 (step S1528).

When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507, step S1514, step S1524, step S1525, step S1528), the peripheral control MPU1530a determines the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time. Determines whether or not has been registered in the work area (step S1530). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are not registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is "No"), this process ends.

When the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. Is determined (step S1531). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531 is “No”), this process is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1530a transfers the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase (step S1532). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1533, step S1534), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the volume control of the sound will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 276 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 276 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 276 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 276 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the game is started and normally BGM is output. Normally, the BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. 274. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503 is "Yes"), the BGM parameter is not normally registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and normal BGM is output (step S1507).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503 is "No").

Further, since the parameter is not registered in the work area at this point (the result of step S1504 is "No"), the sound number, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the BGM is normally playing (the result of step S1506 is "Yes"), the total playback time of the first half notice A is 15,000 ms (the result of step S1510 is "No"), and the new The parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request was made are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520 is "No", the result of step S1521 is "No", and the result of step S1523 is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is playing at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppressed volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppressed volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526 is "No"), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531 is "No"). , This process ends.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503 is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506). The result is "Yes").

Further, the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510 is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520 is "No").

Next, since the suppressed volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppressed volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "0" (step). The result of S1521 is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522).

Further, since the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total playback time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523 is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the warning effect sound effect (step S1524).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is usually "50" for BGM, "100" for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and the suppression volume value "0" for the blackout notice effect sound effect recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526 is "No"), so that the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527).

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening during the execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the pending winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the total playback time is "2000", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503 is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506 is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "2000" (the result of step S1510 is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". (The result of step S1520 is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is "50" (the result of step S1521 is). Since “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playback time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1523 is). “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is “Yes”). Then, even if the output of the hold winning sound is completed (time t34), since the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531 is “Yes”), so that the blackout stored in the work area ends. The parameter of the effect sound effect is deleted (step S1532). Then, the volume of the normal BGM whose sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the sound effect of the first half notice A are returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice A, but it is restored at the normal volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of other sound effects during playback is muted, and while it is possible to make a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) stand out, the effect sound effect is produced during the mute period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed by executing a specific effect. While notifying the player, if the output of the sound effect is continued until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to emphasize the execution of a specific effect. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is produced when there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). When the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered due to the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no free channel (the number of free channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. By controlling the less important sound output to be selectively discarded based on the priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design and reduce the enjoyment of the game. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to devise technical measures in terms of how to make it difficult for the channel itself to appear when there is no vacancy in the channel (the number of vacant channels is 0).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to the effect sound effect (effect sound). As for the notification sound of, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 277 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the production sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definitions of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and the effect sounds are omitted. Regarding the production sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 236, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 240 is defined for each channel except the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to the channel X will be given priority, and will be assigned to the channel X and output after the output of the notification sound is completed. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, the volume output from the left and right speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 278 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds illustrated in FIG. 277, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) for ending the notification, for each type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a free channel as much as possible in order to effectively utilize a single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent output of the notification sound.

As shown in FIG. 278, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 2404 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. As for the notification time, the loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" ends in 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic sensor 2404 detects it. On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued to be executed until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that notifies that it is in the state), and the first big winning opening sensor 2403 or the second big winning opening sensor even though it is not in the big hit gaming state (the state where the big winning opening is open) Notification sound 3 (large) notifying that the detection by 2402 is in a state (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win a game ball) is being performed. (Prize winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group have their notification modes and Both the notification time and the cancellation condition are set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is terminated, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps are used. With regard to lighting by, the execution will be continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the detection by the first prize opening sensor 2403 or the second prize opening sensor 2402 is detected. Regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition "return of power" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing is a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed). A combination of the alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of which content of the notification is adopted is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an item belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side responds to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (cheating). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of "boo-boo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open"). ”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release conditions of "door closure detection (door frame open switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of cheating has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of them. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame open switch is used as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is detected, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, as for the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (cheating). A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as "ping pong ping pong", which plays a role of notifying that there is a moderate possibility that There is.

In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been performed), while not making the person who is playing the proper game feel disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as the notification sound, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. It is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent by notifying by lighting various lamps that are not displayed.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though the time is not shortened. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2401 (a state in which the game is performed in a mode that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to a game in a proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 2401 is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where the ball should be removed) is provided to guide the game to proceed properly, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the state to be expected, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to be common. It is said.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" is repeatedly output as the notification time, and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects the display. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 2401 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process that repeats the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silence data as a set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be a silent part in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence time in between. It will be possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 277 and 278, the same priority is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the playback type setting, it was decided to adopt loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, the "boo-boo" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping-pong ping-pong" commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 279 (a) shows the processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 279 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tα1 where no notification sound is output, the main control In the MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and the information is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. When it is grasped that is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned (set) to the channel X, and the notification mode thereof. (Here, the loop of "Boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c for peripheral control. The schedule data storage area of the RAM 1530c is set to 1530cae. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By setting the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c to 1530 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) will be executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), in the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, step S84 ( It is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration in the process of FIG. 212). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 where the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of vibration detection is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends and the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection. Schedule data for generation is set, notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and setting it in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal can be performed. These are executed for the lamp lighting.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in the lamp lighting.

After that, at the timing tα3 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set to time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been played 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1530a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound will be played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of "Boo-boo vibration has been detected" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, "Boo-boo vibration is detected". It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo vibration") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 279 (a)), when the 6th alarm sound (here, "boo-boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "magnetism has been detected") have finished playing, the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was reproduced. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" and "Boo Boo vibration was detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 time-ups at the warning sound of “boo-boo” and ends, resulting in a message sound. Even if it is not regenerated, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped (only magnetic anomaly). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is prompted to check the display inside the liquid crystal, and the display inside the liquid crystal shows "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 279 (b) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 279 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), at the timing tβ1 in which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 in the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212). If there is, the main control MPU1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), the information that the frame opening detection has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and peripheral. It will be set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the control RAM 1530c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transferred from the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By extracting and setting the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c to 1530cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is the release condition of the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S82. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so as to indicate that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 278 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230). Not assigned. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Was set, and when the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) was not reached when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) was completed, the door open detection was performed. Schedule data for sound generation is set, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is used. The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. The above-mentioned liquid crystal is formed by extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and setting the schedule data in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in the schedule data storage area. These are executed for the inside display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamp light emission, and the lighting mode data for generating the light emission mode according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1530a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and sets the schedule data. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 279 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and "the door is open ping pong ping pong" are connected at strange places, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The occurrence can be suppressed suitably.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 279 (c) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 279 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of being in a non-time saving state in the process of step S84 or S88 (FIG. 212). Assuming that the gate sensor 2401 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information of is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (set). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate portion 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the gate sensor 2401 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1530a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 2401 is performed in a non-time saving state. Is performed, and the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 2401 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to various control data of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. It is extracted from the area and set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By setting the storage area to 1530 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (time-up of the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance)), which is the release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S82 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state, the information that the lower plate full tank is detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (detection of full lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 278 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting the setting, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1530a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not yet been set. Set this for (seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball in the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1530a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen is generated according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and setting it in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c at 1530 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is executed. ing.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3 where 20 seconds have passed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1530a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing (for example, the timing of "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") and it is not played. You will be able to encourage.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 279 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 280 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the magnetism Regarding the processing according to the detection (magnetic anomaly processing), the same processing as in the case described with reference to FIG. 279 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), the timing t-2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1 and the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state. In step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 277). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

And usually, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is similar to the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 279 (a) and 279 (c) overlaps. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the door opening detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was being played back in the loop, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong". The loop processing will be terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected", the notification content will start from the message sound (door is open), so that the first notification group is in the most tense situation. It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 280 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 2401 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S84 or S86 (FIG. 212). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 277), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 279 (a) and 279 (c) overlaps. The process is performed so that only the timer of is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the minute amount, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is not included at a good timing. Will be reproduced, so that it will be possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Will be.

FIG. 280 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S84 It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of FIG. 212. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 ( (See FIG. 277), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is output in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The contents will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in both the sound and the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set up to that point. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emitting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, screen generation schedule data, and light emission mode generation schedule data according to magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is assigned based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 can be performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. Is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played 6 times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 280 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 280 (d), at the timing tζ1 where no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 2401 in the non-time saving state is detected in the process of step S84 or S86 (FIG. 212). If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed strike detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed strike guidance process) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 279 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is started, and the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up at the timing tζ3. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is in the loop playback state, step S82 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 277), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) processing is reflected as the actuator operation. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method of preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also maintained in the set state. Set the generation schedule data respectively. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is made so that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), at the timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. In any of the above, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. The notification sound belonging to the second notification group is performed by the alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be promptly notified that the situation has changed to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 277 should be output, various above-mentioned processes are performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. is there. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily output. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 281 to 286, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 281 to 286.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 281, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state, the magnetic sensor having a relatively high priority regarding notification. Magnetic detection by 2404 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door opening detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 281, the magnetic sensor 2404 is in a situation where the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing. Magnetic detection is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to end, and then the door frame 3 is opened. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger even if some countermeasure is taken.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection ends is reached, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. In addition, even as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation becomes unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activity will be recognized as being too risky. Will be.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification processing belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being played (whether the notification sound is being played) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 281, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and notification by the first notification group and the second notification group during the period from timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and the other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection is terminated is reached, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that was already in the terminated state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds may not be suppressed and may be continued.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, as is clear from the process corresponding to the door opening detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the door opening detection are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 282, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 2401 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 281, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, so that the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 2401, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an act has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 283, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, that is, the example shown in FIG. 281. Is the same as. However, in the example shown in FIG. 283, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 283, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected form. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 283, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 281, a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open the door frame 3 and then detects the door opening. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound to finish playing, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the situation has entered. However, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated after the timing tα34, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 283, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 284, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, as shown in FIG. 281. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 284, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 284, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed, an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cooled. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404, and despite the fact that a magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced in response to this, the magnet is kept within the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that they are trying to put it back in, and there is a possibility that more malicious cheating is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 ( The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection over a longer period of time from the time when the first magnetic detection is made to the elapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is made. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The special process of resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection" and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", and also in the middle such as "inspect the boo-boo magnetism". It will be played back in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 281. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 285, when waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to be completed and trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. Is assumed, and there is a possibility that more malicious cheating is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form that is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is finished, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration has been detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing. For example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. "Schedule data" is set again, and a special process of reassigning the notification sound to channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" that is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appeared in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 286, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. doing.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 286, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection is further generated immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since there is no such thing, it can be assumed that there is a possibility that the magnetic sensor 2404 may be mistakenly detected when the hole side uses a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 286, at the timing tα64 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is performed. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when an erroneous detection on the hall side occurs, the notification process according to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed by simply closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all notification sounds, liquid crystal display, lamps), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false positives and maintain a suitable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 286, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) according to magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to end.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 232), it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume is reduced, the player sets the speaker volume (player set value), and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the speaker volume is set by the player. Performs processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Phi Phi!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the production sound (for example, the output volume of the production sound ("20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in audible sound volume).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1530a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period when the game can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, the game is maintained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various production sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine is concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or a door is opened, a process of assigning a specific notification sound according to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel and outputting it is performed. Further, at this time, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound out of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of the effect, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, only the amount of the specific notification sound assigned to the channel is normal ( More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is a case where there are no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound, one of the sound data at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, the above-mentioned effect progress notification process is used. It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be adopted in order to reduce the cost and improve the reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin to reduce the risk of running out of free channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, when the notification process under the production progress is executed due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value is set according to the content of the production progress. It is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed to. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the notification processing under the progress of the production is performed, if a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the content of the production, the output volume (possible) Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification process under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be lowered due to the lack of free channels and the inability to properly output the production sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value drops to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the effect while the notification process under the progress of the effect is being executed, a new operation is performed. When the effect progress notification process is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point. In this way, the effect progress notification process is completed by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player setting value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests of the game. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a vacant channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of changes in the user setting value or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change, but this volume adjustment completion sound is normally played. The sound may be output in a special mode different from that of the above (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of free channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, it depends on the number of changes of the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the production progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification processing under the production progress due to the false detection or the notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 287 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of the effect separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the effect progress notification process is referred to with reference to FIG. 287. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 277 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 287, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the production sound is silenced. It is illustrated as a thing to make.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of the above is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound). The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the playback of the notification sound (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, grand prize anomaly) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time Then, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability The emphasis is on maintaining the sound, and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process for suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, the termination condition of the process to be suppressed is different in the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 288 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 288 (A), the player setting value is "3" out of "1" to "5" with respect to the volume of the effect sound, and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that volume. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the start winning prize is awaited, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player setting values "1" to "5" is is also executed. To. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when there is an operation by the player. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, both of them may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 288 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is in the range of the player set values "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 288 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The person setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit judgment is made, as shown in FIG. 288 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit judgment and the type of the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 288 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. It is designed to allow reception by the player even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 288 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 288 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 288 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at "80", which is the volume after the change, and the player setting is performed in the second operation. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times higher than that. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This makes it clear which of the current setting values is for the range of player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

As shown in FIG. 288 (D), the second volume value display OH2 has been displayed since the operation was performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 288 (C). It is hidden after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), after which the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 289, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 289 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 289 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to the detection. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (A), the effect is produced. The output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume (audible sound volume) of the production sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's set value (player set value) regarding the volume is this. Accepting the change of itself, when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point As mentioned above, it is changed all at once.

That is, FIG. 289 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 289 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the effect display on the game board side In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so the second volume value. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the production progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering processes) is completed, as shown in FIG. 289 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here, "10"), and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the first specific value (here, "10") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, the effect progress notification process is completed by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player setting value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests of the game. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) as the notification process under the progress of production is completed, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification processing under the production progress due to the false detection or the notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 290, when the state detection generated in FIG. 289 is a magnetic anomaly instead of opening the door, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection is performed while the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 290 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 289 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 290 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 289 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process is executed in response to such a magnetic anomaly, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound (mute here)), which has been lowered to ()), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's set value (player set value) itself regarding the volume. The change reception is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is displayed. As described above, the batch change is performed.

That is, FIG. 290 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 290 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person, is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and since the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, the effect display on the game board side In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of “1” to “5” of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so the second volume value. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

By the way, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed. The notification process under the progress of the production is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 290 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be "80" from the second specific value (here, "0") according to the first operation, and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the second specific value (here, "0") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

When the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (D), the game board side effect display device The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is finished, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. In contrast to the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , It will be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment until the notification processing under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also output when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic anomaly is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate production cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of free channels even though the notification processing under the production progress due to the notification due to the false detection is finally completed. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 201, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as "boo-boo magnetism detected" is shown in FIG. Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification processing under the progress of the production is not executed. Therefore, the player is set during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 201, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to "1" (0x1FF) in the third byte of the initial volume value, so that regardless of the player setting value, It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change but also before the start of the symbol change and in a form straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the processing described with reference to FIG. 289 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 290 are made to have different suppression modes of the production sound during the period during which the production progress notification processing is being performed, but the suppression mode is not always the same. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of the sound) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (volume of audible sound) is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning a prize in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 277 to 290, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only one channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical techniques are required regarding the channel allocation of the production sound at a stage before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical ideas made regarding the output of the production sound will be described in sequence. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and even if all the channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "a button operation" has been performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silent data composed of only silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if special production conditions such as a jackpot confirmation effect and a look-ahead effect are satisfied as a result of the game ball being accepted in the specific winning opening, the effect is satisfied. At this point, no special sound corresponding to the effect is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and playing it (post-announcement effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the lack of channels even though a special result is obtained by the judgment according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound that is executed only when the big hit is won by the big hit judgment according to the prize, the production mode based on the big hit judgment according to the prize is highly expected (for example). , High-expected advance notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by pre-reading judgment according to winning. It is possible to exemplify a look-ahead notification sound that is executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by judgment by a predetermined judgment means according to a prize. Anything that can be done will do.

FIG. 291 shows, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, a cure) that matches the so-called look-ahead effect as a “special sound” when the game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a look-ahead effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing which is reserved in advance from time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. , The first and second starting port winning processes shown in FIG. 257 are performed. In this first / second start port winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the start port (first start port 2002 or second start port 2004), and it corresponds to the case when it is determined that the game ball has won a prize. As described above, the process of increasing the number of reservations on the special symbol side by 1 is performed.

However, in reality, in the first and second starting port winning processes, although not shown, the look-ahead processing for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning starting port side is also executed (for example, the first starting port 2002). If it is on the side (first special drawing side), it is executed as a process between steps S6204 and S6205, and if it is on the second starting port 2004 side (second special drawing side), it is executed as a process between steps S6207 and S6208. It has become so.

Here, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among symbol types, and a small hit group among fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among symbol types, and a small hit group among fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information (pre-reading command) obtained from the read-ahead command when the determination process for whether or not a jackpot has been won and the symbol variation thereof have not been digested and they are put on hold. Expectations for whether the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold will obtain a special result based on the information related to the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side and the information related to the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a starting prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the starting prize. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 256 are performed. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display according to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation). When it is determined whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether it is displayed, and it is determined that the mode (for example, blue, red, or not to perform the look-ahead effect) according to the result of the determination is performed. The process of performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is digested, the look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a cure) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. There are many. However, since such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is played at the timing of winning the game ball that occurs irregularly, the winning of the game ball occurs at the timing when there is no space in the channel, and the pre-reading judgment is made. If there is a chance of winning, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 291, as described above, the special sound is produced before the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is made to win the game ball and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. The channels that can be assigned are prior to the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the look-ahead effect) has not been made yet). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 291, the number of jackpot determinations (number of holds) currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. The game (handle operation) is performed so as to be performed. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, up to four jackpot determinations are put on hold according to the winnings, and the jackpot determinations are made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and look-ahead effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. Then, when the look-ahead determination is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the prize is won and the look-ahead judgment is made), and a specific mode is used. The hold display with will appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is also, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, when the look-ahead judgment is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, the special sound (for example, cure) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in the state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) is output after waiting for the channel targeted for channel reservation processing to become free. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing when a special sound (for example, a cure) is output, or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead determination occurs. Good. However, when the hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead judgment occurs, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed In any of the look-ahead effects, it is desirable that only one mode (for example, only red) can appear as a specific mode.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (not shown) is used. Detects this as an object and triggers the channel reservation process to start.

For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 291, the player holds his / her hand near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer mode, first, the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and the "countdown" is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning "audio" to a predetermined channel and playing it is performed. The countdown voice starts from "30", counts down every second, and ends when the countdown reaches "0". Further, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, an effect in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 for the "shrine torii (pray mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in the predetermined channel. This can be generated as an opportunity (detection by the sensor) only by itself, and it is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the ongoing symbol fluctuation. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to different contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is determined. It is now possible to keep the channel in use (here, the state of use by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) in which the channel reservation process is executed elapses, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the judgment result (look-ahead winning) that the look-ahead effect is performed as the result of the judgment according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a waiting state for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) that is in the waiting state in this way is output as a post-notification sound that is output after the winning time at the timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the playback of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no prize, or if a special judgment result is not obtained (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends is reached, it is special. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cue) is not output at that time and the "countdown voice" is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect to output at the timing when it is finished and a vacancy occurs in the channel. Therefore, even though a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a free channel. Further, even if a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cuein) corresponding to the special determination result (pre-reading winning) is provided at one timing at which at least one channel has a vacancy. Since the playback is aimed at tY12, a special judgment result (look-ahead) within a relatively long time of timings tY11 to tY12 is required as long as it is confirmed whether or not a special sound (cure) is generated at timing tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether you have won).

When the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are vacant at the timing tY12 and played. However, if the special sound (cuein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-announcement effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. It is designed to continue to be displayed even after the timing of termination has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to re-occur the channel reservation process each time the number of reservations decreases, and before holding their hands. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand over the "Torii of the shrine" as a background image (the probability that the special sound will be played at the timing of the later announcement will increase). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, the player holds his hand over even if the "shrine torii" is displayed as the background image or the "shrine torii" is not displayed as the background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for a predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (countdown sound). Therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the post-notification sound is finished.

Further, when the player holds his hand again during the period of timings tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the playback time of the "countdown voice" is from the timing when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the re-detection. May be extended to output a special sound according to the pre-reading winning when the timing is reached.

In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol fluctuation is in the fluctuating state but also when the symbol fluctuation is not in the fluctuating state. You may try to do it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (second prize) are compared with the case where the special sound (cuein) is output at the time of winning. It is difficult to know which of the 2nd hold), the 3rd prize (3rd hold), and the 4th prize (4th hold) has obtained the special judgment result (look-ahead winning). There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the hold being digested without recognizing that the hold has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuein"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (first prize). It is also conceivable to make the difference depending on which hold of the 4th prize (4th hold) is pre-read and won. However, with this, the content of the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "Kyuin") changes, so it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is obtained for any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). The process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, "cuein") starting from the timing tY12 is performed according to whether or not (pre-reading winning) is obtained.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 291, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) of winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 292, a case where a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) in which the winning is made at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Assuming, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, and if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kyuin" is played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cure cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the third winning (third hold), which is won at a relatively late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kyuin" is 3 It is played back in batches and a sound in the form of "cure cue cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 294, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced from the timing tY12 for 12 seconds. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kyuin" is 4 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound in the form of "Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin Kyun".

According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, as well as the timing. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by winning a prize. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more it is suggested that the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the later timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. ..

In this example, it can be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 to tY12 and a special judgment result is obtained according to the prize, but also in this case, depending on the timing when the prize is generated. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is changed as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to 4 at the maximum, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Kyuin" 1 regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second prize, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the playback time for the second "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and make a special judgment in the third prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the 4th winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four "cueins".

Further, in this embodiment, when a look-ahead winning is obtained, "cuein" is played as a special sound, but the first judgment result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won. The reproduced content as the special sound may be changed depending on which of the low pre-reading winning) and the second determination result (for example, the pre-reading winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, whereas the look-ahead when a prize is won is played. When the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading winning was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (relatively low expectation pre-reading winning) and the second judgment result (relatively high expectation pre-reading winning) as the pre-reading winning It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 is the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation). ) Is obtained, and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that won the prize at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the "cure" mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 (1st prize). It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained by the look-ahead determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was possible to win the pre-reading in the pre-reading judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, in response to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the prize was won at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the second pre-reading judgment in the fourth prize (fourth hold) is the second. It will be possible to predict that a judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the second start port 2004, "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is performed. Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 295 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be set. The first prize (first hold) that won the prize at an extremely early timing is the prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special figure side) is the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It will be possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the look-ahead was won even in the look-ahead judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment in the first prize (first hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the fourth prize (fourth hold) is on the second starting port 2004 side. It becomes possible to predict that the second determination result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment corresponding to the winning prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening while the channel reservation process is being executed. , The case where the pre-reading winning in the pre-reading effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 295 is, in short, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid a channel shortage that occurs when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained and cannot be output. It has technical features in itself. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect.

[Channel usage restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds is recorded. The ratio of restricting the execution of output-related processing is increased (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, at least for some game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of free channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of free channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of free channels to 0.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), the digested symbol variation Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed, and the channel is vacant. When there is no room in the situation, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is increased at least until the symbol variation that is the judgment target is completed, and the channel restriction with such symbol variation as one unit is set. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol variation targeted for determination is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and as the level value becomes higher, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound increases.

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process related to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

It is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 230). Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 296, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is completed.

Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, or the symbol Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel becomes the least vacant within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol without starting the reach effect. To do. Further, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the channel is channeled within the period of the latter half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol variation). Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the most free channels are exhausted.

However, if an effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to the "second half of the change" is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process itself of step S3103, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of free channels "Y" in the process of step S3103 (a value that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

Next, as the process of step S3104, the "X" specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation targeted for determination. , It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0, and that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended production mode will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This means that the production content of the first half of the fluctuation (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) is shared by a plurality of production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced by specifying the minimum number of free channels in units of the first half of the fluctuation. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel limit level setting does not necessarily have to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and the effect from the start to the stop of the symbol fluctuation is achieved. With the pattern as one unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channels are most vacant within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here refers to sounds that are automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined progresses (BGM-related, symbol stop-related according to the jackpot determination, and jackpot determination). It shows how many channels are left as vacant state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effect related). Therefore, button press sounds (sounds associated with effects generated based on button operations, etc.), volume adjustment completion sounds, various notification sounds, block winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a general winning opening), and pending winning sounds (first) The production patterns (production contents) to be judged, such as the sound associated with winning the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) and the normal electric production sound (sound associated with the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), have been developed. Various sounds that are not always executed just by squeezing are not included as the judgment target.

FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a value of a channel limit level separately set for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of a restriction content separately set for the channel limit level. ..

As shown in FIG. 297, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, among various game sounds, block winning sounds (winning to the general winning opening) are used as sounds to be restricted from using the channel. (Sounds associated with), hold winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a prize at the first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004), Fuden production sounds (sounds associated with production according to the judgment of a normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a margin in the vacant channel, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) is executed. None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize in the general winning slot during the execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first starting port 2002 or the first starting port 2002 or during the execution of the symbol variation. If there is a prize in the second starting port 2004, the hold prize sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played back, and when the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the normal symbol corresponding to the effect is used. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played back, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and played back.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a little margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. Of the sounds), the channel use limit (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a prize in the general prize opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is paid out, but this is specified for the block prize sound. It will be processed so that it will not be assigned to a free channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning in the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. 297. Set to "2". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively small margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are applied. Of the completed sounds), channel use restrictions (50% restrictions) are generated for two sounds, the block winning sound and the holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the prize balls for the minutes are paid out and the above-mentioned first and second starting port winning processes are performed, the pending winning sounds are processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the hold winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 297. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, assuming that there is no room in the vacant channel to execute the symbol fluctuation, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. A channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound). That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restrictions on the block winning sound and the holding winning sound, even if the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal electric effect sound is not included. Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completed sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data for the Fuden production sound and volume adjustment completed sound, and do not play the Fuden production sound or volume adjustment completed sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is executed in which the number of free channels in a state where no sound is not assigned becomes less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the same free channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation is not less than the number, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output is output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the execution of related processing is restricted and the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, among various game sounds, the sound for which channel use is restricted is not the most important "directing sound related to jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". , "Direction sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment" are limited. That is, even if the channel use is restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect of whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not restricted and is appropriately executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol variation. The decline in game interest when channel usage is restricted will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above configuration, a plurality of types of sound types that are candidates for channel use restriction target among various game sounds are prepared (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation is), the number of sound types that are subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, a method that limits the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increases the ratio of execution restrictions as the number of free channels decreases. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the method described with reference to FIG. 298 may be adopted.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content separately determined for each channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 298, in this alternative example, the channel is used according to the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A restricted lottery will be held as to whether or not restrictions will be applied. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared and a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound) is obtained. The restriction processing related to the channel use is performed only for (etc.).

For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel is used. The channel use restriction process is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a judgment result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained increases as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). The same probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), and the same probability is 50/100 when the channel limit level is 2 (minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel limit level. The same probability is 100/100 when is 3 (minimum number of free channels is 0,1). Then, in this alternative example, when the determination result that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels in which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is increased. Compared to the case where the symbol variation which does not become less than a predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases and the number of free channels decreases, it is preferable that the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum free channel during the execution period of the symbol variation is confirmed. It will be possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it will be possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

In the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 297 and 298, the minimum number of free channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects after the determination processes related to the various notice effects are executed based on the effect patterns, and the specified minimum free channels are specified. We decided to set the channel limit level based on the number of channels, but this is not always the case. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be assigned to channels at the same time during the symbol fluctuation period for each production pattern, the susceptibility to channel shortage is classified in advance according to the production pattern. I will do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of channel shortage in which the effect pattern is classified in advance, the higher the channel restriction ratio may be. That is, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not used and empty channels are not actually used without button operation or various prizes. Even if there is a margin in the number of, there may be a situation where the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, but the free channel can be performed only by performing a simple processing. It is extremely beneficial in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of beings becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of free channels during the symbol fluctuation is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high, and when the number of free channels is relatively large during the symbol variation, the rate at which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high. Only the phenomenon of "becomes low" appears, and since it is a phenomenon that does not cause any discomfort from the player side, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it becomes possible to infer the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause channel shortage.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 297 and 298 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is developed as the production content progresses within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is made unchanged by a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the channel restriction level is set to the channel restriction level. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 297 and 298 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted from using the channel is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. It was decided to use only "sounds associated with winning", "directing sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since some of these sounds occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that makes it possible to secure free channels more effectively, "related to the jackpot determination". It is desirable to adopt "directed sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "directing sound related to the jackpot judgment", there is a concern that the directing sound will not be reproduced and the production will be lacking in excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some cases, the game interest may deteriorate.

In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 297 and 298 and other examples thereof, among the "directing sounds related to the jackpot judgment", only the "directing related to the symbol fluctuation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" is produced. If the use of sound channels is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 298 or another example), the effect related to the result of the symbol change during execution Therefore, it will be possible to adopt the production sounds that occur frequently as the restriction target without any restrictions.

For example, if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the period when the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the winning is put on hold, the hold is usually made. Performs a determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect on the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the pending jackpot judgment is a jackpot win is performed. Become.

However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about availability (such as when the minimum number of available channels is 0 or 1 and the symbol fluctuation is in progress), the channel usage is restricted to "pending state". If "the production sound according to the production related to the symbol fluctuation that will be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize will be generated for the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the jackpot judgment corresponding to this will be suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed for the jackpot determination put in the hold state, and both the look-ahead effect and the corresponding effect sound are not performed.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety arises about the vacancy, the channels that are assigned to the production related to the future symbol fluctuations that are not the ongoing symbol fluctuations are being executed. Since it will be possible to supply the production sound related to the fluctuation of the pattern, the production sound that occurs frequently will be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation during execution. You will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "the effect related to the symbol change for the future that is in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will be restricted when it is put on hold in the future. Since the effect during the change of the symbol (the content of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the restriction target of the effect can be preferably suppressed.

In addition, when "directing sound related to big hit judgment" is targeted for restriction, if only the directing sound of the directing (directing display, directing sound) is targeted for restriction (no sound output), the production lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about the vacancy, a prize will be won and the jackpot judgment will be put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Therefore, a special result (pre-reading winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. Only the same effect situation as at that time (hold display when the look-ahead effect is not executed) is obtained, and it becomes possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the game interest due to the effect execution lacking excitement.

When the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when the prize is won and the jackpot judgment is put on hold, and the effect display and effect related to the look-ahead effect are not executed. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the "directed sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the pre-reading effect is judged when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, but limits them, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. You may want to do this by canceling. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the look-ahead effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), which is different from the case where the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is not restricted (normal time), and is special. Since the pre-reading effect is executed after making it appear as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform favorably.

In addition, as processing related to future production under the situation where channel use is restricted, ・ Judgment processing for pre-reading production is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during symbol fluctuation has arrived. Until this is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed, but these are restricted, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is displayed. The first restriction processing is a configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed.
-The game proceeds when the second restricted processing is such that the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when a prize is won and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Among them, when the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number, compared with the case where the symbol variation in which the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed. Therefore, the ratio of execution of either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed. Let "A" be the expected value of the number of channels used in, and "B" be the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted processing is performed. Then, it is more desirable to execute either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing so that the relationship becomes "A <B". That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted instead of the first restricted processing that limits only the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second restriction processing is increased, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used is increased is more preferably suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in the output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered. A process of ending the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds for which the allocation to the channel is continued (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is lowered (suppression state)). It will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 299 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 299, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "production A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is in the stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of production. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of the production, the production content of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by finishing the allocation of the production sound from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a free channel becomes insufficient and a new sound cannot be assigned and played as it progresses.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is in the middle of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) and the effect sound is removed from the channel and changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state is reduced, and there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is lowered by the decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), first, before the timing tk13 for removing the sound of the “production A reproduction” from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and ending the reproduction arrives. From the "timing tk12" to the arrival of the "timing tk14" after the timing tk13, the sound of the "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced. Allocate to playback channels 08 and 09 to bring them into a playback (here, stereo playback) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 299 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of the “effect B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state, the timing tk13 at which the “effect A reproduction” is terminated. Along with the arrival of the above, it is decided to perform a process (volume suppression process) of reducing the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" while keeping them assigned to the channels.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to 4 times. After the production content has been developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the production is performed as to whether the production content is further developed according to step 4. Therefore, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect are assigned to the channels. If a high-expected production mode that further develops into the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression process is completed and the volume is returned to the normal volume (a production with a relatively high degree of expectation). While the specific production sound corresponding to the production content of the step 4 is output as the sound of the "effect B reproduction", the effect content according to the step 3 is used without developing into the production content according to the step 4. When a low-expected production mode in which the production is completed appears (a production with a relatively low degree of expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of the “production B reproduction”.

According to such a configuration, an effect design is made in which the timing tk13 arrives aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the “effect A” is performed while the volume suppression process is performed. Since the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use has decreased (the sound of "effect A playback" is in the non-playback state. It will be possible to make it difficult to notice what was done).

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (c), the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (step). Within the period in which the production content (production of whether or not it develops to step 4) that leads to any of the production content (production content that does not develop to 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops), the above-mentioned The volume suppression process is executed to remove the sound of "effect A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and end the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is lowered, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B (the sound of "production B reproduction"). Since the production A (sound of "production A playback") is terminated at, the volume of the production sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "production B playback" was returned. Occasionally, even if the sound of "Production A playback" is prevented from being reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectations (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectations (production content that develops to step 4) It becomes possible to attract interest in which of the production contents that do not develop into step 4) appears, and to make it difficult to notice that the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this explanatory example, although the volume is lowered while a plurality of production sounds including the sound of "production B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, all the production sounds are reduced. The volume is not lowered, and a specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. That is, in this case, the volume of some of the production sounds (the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is reduced while being reproduced as usual without suppressing the volume, and thus the sounds can be distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated while the sound is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. Will be.

Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the sound reproduction of the "effect A reproduction" is not terminated immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has passed since the volume suppression process was started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already diminished. Therefore, the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is aimed at such a timing. By ending the reproduction of the sound, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this explanatory example, the volume of the effect sound targeted for the volume suppression process is gradually reduced, and the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 299, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced while the sound of "effect A reproduction" is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sound of "Production A playback" is started to be played while the sound of "Production B playback" is being played, and the sound of "Production B playback" is being played back in the suppressed state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be an effect accompanied by an effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced based on the operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.), and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of "effect B reproduction" is reproduced. The reproduction of the above may be terminated in the above-described manner.

Further, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process. On the contrary, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower volume than usual, it is difficult to notice that the sound reproduction of "Direction A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, the specific production sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") according to the production pattern is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal volume remains unchanged. Although it is designed to be continuously played, the volume of all the effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. On the contrary, with respect to the sound of "Direction A reproduction", it is possible to maintain the volume without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is lowered. While attracting the player's interest in the sound of "Direction B playback" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "Direction A playback" is terminated, and then the sound of "Direction B playback" is included. Even if the sound of "Production A playback" is not played back when the volume of multiple production sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned, the production content with relatively high expectations (step 4) The sound of "Direction A playback" is reproduced, attracting interest in which of the production content that develops into (the production content that develops into) and the production content that has relatively low expectations (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You will be able to make it harder to notice that it is no longer being done.

In addition, during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "effect A reproduction" and "effect B reproduction" is performed, at least while the volume suppression process is performed (after the volume of "effect B reproduction" is lowered from the normal value). (Until it is returned to the normal value), even if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of "Direction B reproduction" more favorably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. In addition, even if a special result (pre-reading winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when a prize is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 299, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is terminated within the period when the volume of the effect sound is decreased, and when the period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in the state of volume decrease until then. We decided to raise the volume of the production sound that had been used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, at the end of the period, a special production sound that was not previously assigned to the channel will be added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played (played at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it became interesting to see if a special production sound was played when the volume was returned, and it was further noticed that the sound of "Production A playback" was no longer played. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is reduced compared to before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may be lowered, but a special production sound. Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (played at the normal volume), so that the same or more sound before the volume is lowered and after the volume is restored (two or more production sounds are sent to the channel). Since it will be possible to use the channel of (when newly assigned), it is also preferable that the player feels as if the expectation level has decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special production sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special production sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

If you want to newly assign a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel when the volume is returned and play it, the channel that became vacant due to the sound assignment of "Production A playback" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special production sound to. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of production with a small amount of channel resources.

Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298. As "Production A" is adopted as, the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the more the channel is specially opened (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to make people feel uneasy about running out of channels, it is possible to continuously output "Direction A" without ending it in the middle. become.

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. Perform the process of causing. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special production sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the production pattern is output in an unsuppressed mode (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe the channel is full and the special production sound cannot be output". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") is left assigned to a channel and it is intended to be output in a suppressed mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the effect reception) after setting the sound of "BGM reproduction") to be output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback dedicated to special production sound playback". It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the symbol is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., the sound of "BGM reproduction" is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". , There is a concern that so-called sound deviation will occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game will be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (1) stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, the sound data at the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) are determined according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the sound is played.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that regulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM reproduction" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling the two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of (partial section). The sound is played back in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach production) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received as a production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is set to start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently (special period) regardless of the production reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in silence, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the playback is started at.

FIG. 300 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 300.

As shown in FIG. 300 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. It may be reproduced as a sound material) based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is obtained. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 300, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 300 (a) and 300 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 at which the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is given, which gives an operation opportunity to generate the effect sound, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe the channel is full and the special production sound cannot be output". It will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, regardless of when the operation by the player is accepted during the operation validity period, the sound of "BGM playback" is in the playback state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. It will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player while providing an atmosphere in which the usage status of the cage channel seems to be affordable. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the reception of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and played back.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period ends at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section where silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as an unsuppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special production sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in the non-suppressed manner of the "BGM reproduction" sound (the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the discomfort caused by returning after a predetermined time is created. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the unsuppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 300 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, the "uncomfortable feeling caused by returning the sound of" BGM reproduction "as a non-suppressed mode when the operation by the player is accepted but after a predetermined time" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attracting attention to the special production sound having a large initial volume value.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, when the operation by the player is received for the effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is generated. The special production sound may be generated based on the fact that the production has been accepted only when the conditions are satisfied. Even when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing of the operation within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly brought into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the transition to is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 300.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened as compared with the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. Anything that is output by Here, as the suppressed mode, in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced can be exemplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently by simply playing it back without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the reception of the effect as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value when the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 300, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. It is desirable to. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not played without being newly assigned to a channel.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable to play sound effects, dialogues, and other directing sounds instead of music so that they do not overlap with the sound of.), And while the specific directing sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and BGM is played. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound in a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including the special production sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298. "BGM playback sound" is adopted as the restriction target, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The ratio of the operation sound output processing under the suppression may be increased. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to cause anxiety that the special production sound is not output due to lack of channels. You will be able to do it.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which sound data is not assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is enabled (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation by the player, the empty channel is created by the operation by the player at the timing immediately before the player's favorite directing sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite directing sound or special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

The operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this explanatory example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 291 to 295. It may be a specific action that has been performed, in short, by a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when such a specific action to be detected (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed. It suffices that the sound assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction is terminated when the detection is detected.

FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when a process related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 301, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, the effect sound effect reproduced during the execution of the super reach effect) corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 00, 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously played over multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), among the sounds in these playback states (BGM1 playback, BGM2 playback), the sound of "BGM2 playback" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). Is targeted for forcibly terminating the channel allocation when is detected, and when the timing tw12 is reached during the period in which the symbol change is being executed, the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is received. The permissible reception period can be generated up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting the user to perform the above is displayed.

Here, FIG. 301A shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 301 (a), if the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at the timing tw13, a process of assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this explanatory example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance, so that the vacancy is obtained. It is possible to assign a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, if vacancy is not secured in advance for other channels, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be played back and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 301 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13. Shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301 (b), if detection is performed by a predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are performed at the timing tw12a where the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be resolved. Further, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the playback state of the sound of "BGM2 playback" is forcibly terminated. In this case, the music or dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 playback" is completed (or). Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back (up to a good point), I feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait with confidence at the timing when a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a where the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the playback state of the sound of "BGM2 playback" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) will be hidden, and the acceptance period for which the production acceptance of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted will end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), in the timing tw13, not the playback channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as free channels, but other channels (playback channels 10, playback channels 10,) which have been regarded as free channels before that. A predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to 11) and played back. However, if there is no space in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and played.

Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, here) is assigned to the specific channel. , BGM2) is assigned, but one channel (specific channel) is assigned because the assigned state is canceled at that point when a specific action detection such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) is triggered. Just by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined production sound (here, the jackpot confirmed sound), respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a finite resource. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. A predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be reproduced.

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound, the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears, or the effect sound suggesting that the jackpot has been lost may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound may be output and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound whose channel allocation is terminated when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and no problem occurs. Therefore, the specific sound is reproduced by a specific action. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), it was decided to generate a reception period in which the production reception of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during the period when the specific sound to be excluded from the channel allocation is in the playback state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is allowed, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. You may try to eliminate. In this case, for example, after maintaining the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, such as a predetermined timing in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, another sound is output to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel allocation of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound such as 1 second) to the same channel. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the specific action is not forcibly terminated.

In addition, at least in the period from the acceptance of the production of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined production sound using the empty channel created by the production reception, a new sound is produced. Specific game sounds (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound) that have nothing to do with the effect of whether the jackpot symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation so that the channel is not wasted due to the occurrence of , Look-ahead effect sound, etc.), it is desirable not to output it.

In addition, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 playback") that is the target of forced termination is played as a non-loop production sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier for the player to feel that a vacant channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormal notification while the production is being performed according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not necessarily output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that it occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always output, so that the channel has a margin corresponding to the occurrence and the risk of running out of free channels is reduced. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") and a game It is possible to execute an abnormality display (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the back-middle movable effect unit 3200") in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. It is desirable that the display at the time of abnormality in the display area be performed so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations the abnormality has occurred, but the plurality of movable decorations are grouped and they are grouped. It may be an aspect of identifying which of the groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 and the like) , Back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, back bottom movable production unit 3700, etc.) are movable on the frame side. An abnormality is displayed in the display area in a manner capable of identifying which side of the decorative body or the movable decorative body on the board side the abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having a relationship in which drive sources are different from each other and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that there is no fault on the player side, and let's deal with it when notified. Therefore, if various games (such as symbol fluctuations and big hit games) according to the jackpot judgment are being executed, the notification process may be executed openly during the execution period. On the other hand, it will have an adverse effect, which is a pleasure for the player. Not only that, the number of free channels becomes insufficient as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is output, which may give the player anxiety that it will not be possible to output a new sound. , There is concern that the interest in games will decline.

However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is also an aspect that it is difficult to assume a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, it is abnormal because the movable decoration body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a cheating act or a fraudulent act such as wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and even under such a situation, if the notification sound corresponding to the moving body abnormality is not output, it may promote cheating and is legitimate. From the perspective of a good player, there is concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of the notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the movable decorative body is being operated based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (outputs the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output (hall side notification) of the information that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the production, and therefore may be performed regardless of the situation.

According to such a configuration, even during the period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to break down (according to the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control (the situation where the movable object drive process of operating the movable decorative object based on the variable pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) In the event of an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 can perform notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound, but at least in a situation where the movable decoration is prone to failure (during the production operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality occurs. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform notification processing such as an abnormal notification sound, so that a person who commits a fraudulent act is restrained from committing the fraudulent act, but is a legitimate game. It will be expected that the person will avoid adversely affecting the production being performed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the abnormality occurrence occur. Since the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, it has an adverse effect on the effect during execution. It will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for operating the movable decorative body again comes after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. No production is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Regardless of this, it is possible to execute a restoration process for causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to recover the movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. If the specific movable decoration is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration.

The movable decorative body is specified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for causing the corresponding movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) is executed. If the player does not return to the position (origin position), it is assumed that the recovery has failed, and the game or production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 302 shows the allocation status of each channel when an abnormality in the movable body is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed. It is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

As shown in FIG. 302 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur for a period up to the timing ti14 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Or, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 302, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, in the timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player is received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body (FIG. 302 (b)). (Refer to), the production sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and played back (see FIG. 302 (a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, it is first determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the restoration process has failed and the restoration cannot be expected. Therefore, the movable body drive process is terminated without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a specific movable decorative body is in a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is in the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in the manner determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decoration is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving for the specific movable decoration is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired. When it is determined that the vehicle has been returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the specific position (original position) within the movable body driving process, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body drive process, the specific movable decorative body performs the effect operation from the timing ti13, but in this explanatory example, the specific movable decorative body is set to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the effect operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot operate. In FIG. 302 (b), the dotted areas indicate the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the drive for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the effect operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is movable. Since it can be said that the situation is likely to have been caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this explanatory example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the movable body abnormality is caused by the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound assignment control to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the effect being executed.

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position). In that case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history is deleted, and after that, it becomes possible to execute the normal movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery fails. If this is done, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern arrives within the same symbol variation or within the symbol variation after the next time, the specific movable decorative body The effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, various light emitting units are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It will be expected to suppress the game entertainment.

In this way, during the period in which the symbol changes, at least when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body By not allocating the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not playing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. 302, this movable body abnormality is caused. When it occurs at a timing different from that when the specific movable decorative body is operated by the effect control (effect pattern), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

FIG. 303 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel at the time of detection, and the situation on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern being produced by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

And, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation valid period (effective period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity is the maximum timing ti14. Can occur over a period of time. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the effecting operation (movement without being based on the effect pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 303 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and after that, it will be possible to execute the normal movable effect without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in the abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable decoration is performed. The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, and an abnormality occurs. Various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body will only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is caused by the restoration process. If it is resolved, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In addition, this explanatory example is based on the assumption that a movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are executing the restoration process, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, it is specific. The effect operation of the movable decorative body is not always performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery fails. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decoration body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decoration body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected because a specific movable decorative body has been removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect content, the abnormal notification sound is played over the predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. It will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, " An abnormality has occurred in the movable production unit 3200 in the back, etc. ") will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, some light emitting parts are made to emit light in an abnormal mode, and the other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal manner according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 302 and 303, even if the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the process, it is unlikely that a fraudulent act has been performed, and there is a possibility of a failure during the effect operation. Therefore, the effect is output with priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed and the abnormality is more than the effect. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output a notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 303, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a in which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, in the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even this alone causes a cheating act or a fraudulent act such as wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wire has been damaged, the notification process may be performed at this timing ti11b according to the abnormality of the movable body.

The point is that, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period when the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation. An abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration as a necessary condition, and "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern". It is important that the above is not executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the legitimate player is being executed. It will be expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decoration is not performing the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decoration is not performed. After adopting at least "an abnormality has occurred in the body", for example, "failure in the restoration process performed in response to the abnormality" or "occurred when the abnormality occurred under a specific situation". Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration within the process of operating the specific movable decoration according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable body is movable. It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined time that is visited regularly.

Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 302, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 303, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, whereby an abnormality of the movable body is detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as the one in which the specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at the timing when the player operates it, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at the specific timing determined by the effect pattern. May be produced.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

If the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern", the abnormality notification is not executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration processing of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained by a judgment by a judgment means according to a prize, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different drive sources and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality). By assigning (sound data) to channels and playing them, it is possible to prevent the number of channels used from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorative bodies. It was. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as the one illustrated in "Abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is being performed". is there.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a game machine has increased, and it is only necessary to associate common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormality notification sounds are transmitted to channels depending on which of those groups the movable decorative bodies belong to. By assigning and making it playable, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the pachinko machine 1 even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 302 and 303). Is processed. Therefore, also in this example, even if various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) occur and are detected during the period of execution, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the (effect pattern) or the movable body drive process for operating the movable decorative body is performed based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (the effect process). The output of the notification sound, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, only one abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and set to the playback state corresponds to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, it is decided to execute a process of causing the restoration operation to be performed on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to reduce the risk of running out of empty channels by giving a margin to the channels. In addition to this, it will be possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it will be expected that the channel usage time will be reduced by improving the efficiency of the processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. Regarding the contents of the restoration process and each process at the time of success or failure, the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 302 and 303). ) Is the same.

Here, as a mode for dividing the plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups, it is required that the mode is suitable for notifying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back) When divided into two groups (right movable production unit 3400, back upper movable production unit 3500, back lower movable production unit 3700, etc.), there is an abnormality in the frame side movable decoration that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3. It is possible to transmit to the hall side depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the board side, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. become. In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body on the board side, it can be said that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than in the case where the movable decorative body on the frame side has an abnormality. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound corresponds to the abnormality of the moving body, but depending on the type, the player does not notice it (unpleasant feelings). It becomes possible to secretly notify the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of possibility of fraud is high.

Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the above notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display is also performed. As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this explanatory example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, and any of those groups. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality as compared with the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound", whereas the information transmission function for notifying the abnormality contents in more detail is excellent. It has various properties. Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in its nature. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the movable decorations belonging to the independently divided groups has an abnormality.

That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on the presence, "While the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and the second notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs. , And "a third notification mode in which the reproduced abnormality notification sound and the displayed notification content are different from each other regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by the notification based on the two different contents of the sound and the display.

FIG. 304 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol is changed, and the situation on the movable decorative body side. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 304 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing tj15 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing tj15. Or, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, based on the operation received by the player, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body, and the channel is performed. The effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation more than the timing tj13. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In addition, in FIG. 304 (b) and FIG. 305 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, the above-mentioned restoration process for causing each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 304, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. , The frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have abnormal movable bodies. It is assumed that each situation has occurred.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 304, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different from that of D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, interference due to contact with each other may occur. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate by utilizing the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other due to their movements, including the relationship with the above, the restoration process is performed at the same time at the timing tj12 so that each movable decorative body can be quickly restored to an abnormal state.

In such a configuration, the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side is provided until the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), which gives the player an operation opportunity, ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the above operation is effective. Regardless of the timing of the production reception within the period (valid period of the production reception), the production is processed so as not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception.

That is, in this case, if the effect reception occurs within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be operated by the effect. However, even if the production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, it is possible to interact with other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a concern that it will interfere. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and played back, and the movable effect is performed by various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. It will only emit light in the manner in which it emits light. In short, if a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the relevant restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all restoration processes are completed successfully). The execution of the effect operation is permitted only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and the above. It is processed so that whether or not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception is changed depending on the timing of the production reception within the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception). Will be.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Will definitely arrive, and even if other movable ornaments A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is the case, the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when the operation is performed is assigned and played back, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. It will emit light.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to extend over the timing at which the restoration process is completed. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Therefore, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C, F perform the restoration process. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even during the execution of, the normal effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) including the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration process is completed (successful restoration processing). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) of the time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay in.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 304 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are described. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are divided into two groups, and the abnormally generated movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot usually occur while the proper game is in progress, and cannot occur as a result of cheating. Therefore, the hall side is required to check the operation of the accessory and repair it. It is likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tampering with all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state at an early stage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively. At the timing tj12, the restoration process on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decoration side are started at the same time as described above, whereas the notification sound output is frame side movable. The abnormal notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the abnormal notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the board side is assigned to the channel. I try to keep it output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process is "board-side movable decoration A, By assigning only the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B and C on the board side" can be generated. It is now possible to end the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during playback, and "Abnormality notification common to the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C". After the output of "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid being required to output the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side". The notification process can be terminated in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, while the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are being restored, the board-side movable decorations A, The "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is assigned to the channel and played over the period until the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Therefore, the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the control of assigning the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode by display in the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in nature from the above-mentioned notification sound. The above grouping is performed in a mode different from that in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it corresponds to this. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, this will be applied. The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable decoration is completed first, depending on the execution status of the restoration process of the movable decoration grouped with the specific movable decoration, the restoration process may be higher than that of the specific movable decoration. It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed will be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 304, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of those notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but the restoration process is in the reproduction state. Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. As a result, for the movable decoration that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the total time required for the restoration process can be shortened as compared with the movable decoration that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state, and a plurality of movable decorations can be shortened. While one of the notification sounds is being played, all the movable ornaments can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side) that can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. The plurality of movable decorations (DF) belonging to at least one group (frame side in the above example) can be classified into the frame side) and the restoration process can be executed independently for each group. If all of them can be restored and operated at the same time by selecting them as movable ornaments that can operate without being influenced by each other's operating conditions, refer to FIGS. 304 and 305. It is possible to configure it so that the described effects are obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined time that is visited regularly. Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, a specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at a timing when the player operates it, but a specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at a specific timing determined by the production pattern. It may be something to make.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation was executed. Although the explanation is based on the assumption of the situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game or when the game of the special symbol is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame side movable decoration D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process is performed according to the movable body abnormality in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 304.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. And said. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other even if they operate simultaneously are included in the board-side movable decorative body, the board-side movable decorative body shall be arranged in a predetermined order. During the restoration process, only some movable ornaments that do not interfere with each other due to contact may be restored at the same time.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are present. It is assumed that the timing at which the occurrence is determined is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 305, after it was determined that a movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a movable body abnormality occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is completed at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is completed, "the frame side movable decoration bodies D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request of the corresponding abnormal notification sound common to the frame side is required.

On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. The processing structure may be set so as to determine that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. After waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are supported. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively, while the notification processing is performed. As a result of waiting for the process of determining whether or not the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F are restored while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is performed.

[17. Detection sensor signal false positive prevention]
Subsequently, a configuration for preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance will be described. The gaming machine described here is, for example, a gaming machine typified by a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like, and relates to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game.

A gaming machine (for example, a so-called pachinko machine) that plays a game by driving a game ball toward the game area and rolling down the driven game ball in the game area is widely known. The game board of such a game machine has a prize detection sensor that detects the winning of a game ball in a winning opening (starting opening, a large winning opening, a normal winning opening, etc.), and detects an illegal game act on the game board. A large number of detection sensors such as a sensor for this purpose (for example, a vibration detection sensor and a magnetic detection sensor) are arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-165673).

In a game machine, there is a situation in which detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, they are arranged in the vicinity of a start port, a winning port, a large winning port, an out port, and the like). Therefore, it is common practice to use a connector member for electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on a panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down when a vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, such as when playing right-handed, contact resistance is generated by this. There is a risk.

When a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to such a situation, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor rises, and there is a risk that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position and a relay board that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In order to solve the problem, the main control board switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage output from the voltage output unit or the second voltage which is lower than the first voltage. The relay board includes a detection circuit unit, and outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, while the second voltage is output when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Between the voltage output unit, the voltage output unit, and the detection circuit unit of the main control board, the detection sensor unit sets the second voltage to the second voltage in the second state. The detection sensor unit is provided with an avoidance unit that avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit even when a predetermined voltage higher than the first voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied. The voltage output unit is electrically connected, and the voltage output unit and the detection circuit unit are electrically connected via the avoidance unit.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], a current flows through the contact resistance of the connector portion to the second voltage in the second state of the detection sensor portion, so that the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a lower predetermined voltage is added, the avoidance unit avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit. As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit is not affected, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member or the like. ..

The gaming machine according to [means 2] is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to [means 1], the avoidance unit includes a Zener diode having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. is there.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], a current flows through the contact resistance of the connector portion to the second voltage in the second state of the detection sensor portion, so that the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a predetermined voltage lower than the predetermined voltage is added, the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage, so that the Zener diode maintains the non-conducting state. That is, the Zener diode avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit.

As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit is not affected, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member or the like. ..

According to the game machine described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor caused by the occurrence of contact resistance of the connector member.

[17-1. Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 306 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a game machine. The game machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g. The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is the same as the magnetic sensor 2404 described with reference to FIG. 203.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, + 5V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It is designed not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to a collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON2. , + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which + 12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied while being connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and a transistor ITR1 in which a base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Applies to.

Further, in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of a circuit composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[17-1-1. Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off when the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. 310. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, pin contact Gap is easier to open than the type. When a gap is opened, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down when playing right-handed, when vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, slight sliding wear occurs. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation of is described. For example, in FIG. 306, when a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 306, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. Then, when the voltage lifted by the contact resistor RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 installed on the panel relay board 4161 may erroneously detect the sensor signal when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[17-2. Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 307 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shall be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the large winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second). In the state), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side. The avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the front stage of the connection part. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[17-2-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off when the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is in such an abnormal state, in the above example, when it is determined that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a is peripheral. An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the voice, or the like.

[17-2-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state (second state) in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to be built-in. The transistor STR turns on.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 307, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener It will be applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command with a magnet. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display, the voice, etc. are notified that an illegal game act using the above is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected. To do. In addition, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[17-3. Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 308 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and whose other end is grounded. It is configured to include the resistance IR3 of. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 306, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point of the transistor ITR0 with the base terminal. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[17-3-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance section 4166 are applied. A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[17-3-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 308, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage. It will be applied to one end of the resistor of 1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is almost grounded. When it falls, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage remains off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

[17-4. Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 309 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is a resistor with two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is configured to include IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit, respectively. You are connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the first stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the second stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are set at one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 in which + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[17-4-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). By connecting the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5, and a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor are applied. A current flows to the ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[17-4-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 309, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage by flowing a current through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Will be applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1 and further, this current flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and most of the current is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistance IR1. It does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage does not turn on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 311, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on to detect the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the voltage output unit 4163 provided for each is provided with a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available product, TOSHIBA). Can be used by connecting to (manufactured).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member. It suffices as long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor by means of various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to Examples 1 to 3. However, unless the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166 is changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The arrangement locations of the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 on the substrate can be variously selectively changed and arranged as needed. Below, some variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[17-5. Example 4]
FIG. 312 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161. The basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 307. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 307.

As shown in FIG. 312, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 for signal relay of the panel relay board 4161, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connected to the connector CON2. It is electrically connected by.

[17-6. Example 5]
FIG. 313 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 is provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. There is. Also in this Example 5, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 307. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 307.

As shown in FIG. 313, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay board 4161 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 for signal relay of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. It is connected.

Further, in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 312 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 313, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses having connector members at both ends (in FIG. 312, they are simply referred to as CON2). ) Is electrically connected. Therefore, contact resistance may occur even at the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection of the signal due to this contact resistance, as a modification of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the pull-up resistor NR1 in which + 12V is applied to the latter stage of the connector member CON2 on the circuit, that is, to one end. Similar to the avoidance section 4166, another avoidance section may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. According to this, false detection of a signal can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is improved.

In the present invention, an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is composed of the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 in which + 12V is applied to one end in Examples 4 and 5 will be described. In essence, this selects the one that is advantageous in terms of control due to the difference in the logic (whether the HI level is active or the LOW level is active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected to the subsequent stage. For that purpose, a circuit including a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, and this is arranged in front of the main input circuit 1310a.

However, the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line, the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, and the emitter terminal is grounded. The main control input circuit 1310a itself, in which the collector terminal is connected to the input port (not shown), substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, the circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, the main unit. (Because it is possible to perform detection with the control input circuit 1310a), however, the present invention is fully valid.

[17-7. Example 6]
FIG. 314 shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. The signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in this Example 6, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 307. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 307.

As shown in FIG. 314, the signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161 is connected and the avoidance section 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

When the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are configured as circuits as in the above-mentioned Examples 4 to 6, the panel relay board 4161 is used as a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. There is an advantage that it can be shared regardless of the type (not limited to).

From the standpoint of ease of assembly, it is desirable to use a relay board, but the first start port sensor 4002 and the second start port sensor 4004 provided at the start port that brings the lottery to the player are convenient. Even if it is missing, it may be better to connect it directly to the main control board 1310 with a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. In such a case, the configuration of Example 7 works well.

[17-8. Example 7]
FIG. 315 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example as well, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in this Example 7, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 307. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 307.

As shown in FIG. 315, the panel relay board 4161 is simply formed with a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays the signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 4161. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in in front of the connection part via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 4161. It is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR of.

In FIG. 315, a relay board provided with only connectors (CON3, CON4) is used, but the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

Even with the configurations shown in [Example 4] to [Example 7], since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so that the connector member When contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance.

In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 through a connector CON3 (represented by a square in the figure) provided on the panel relay board 4161, and further, the panel relay board 4161 is further connected. It is configured to be electrically connected to the connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through the connector CON4 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided in. Therefore, contact resistance may occur at three locations, the connector CON3, the connector CON4, and the connector CON1.

In consideration of this, the voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated by the looseness of the connection part (CON3 and CON4 represented by the square in the figure) of the panel relay board 4161 and the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 part. Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state, the avoidance unit (the amount of voltage added due to the contact resistance generated at each of the above three connector connection parts) The 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, so that when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of each connector member, false detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is prevented. Can be done.

Further, in the configurations shown in [Example 4] to [Example 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance unit 4166, but the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0 and has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 308 (Example 2) and the avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 309 (Example 3) can be used.

Since the panel relay board 4161 shown in the seventh embodiment has only a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays the signal from the detection sensor unit, the signal from the plurality of detection sensor units can be received. There is an advantage that the panel relay board 4161 is integrated independently, the printed wiring is formed so as to be integrated into one connector member, and the main control board 1310 is connected to the connector.

[17-9. Electrical connection of detection sensor, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, the electrical connection of the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 4161, and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 316 is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of an electrical connection between a detection sensor unit, a panel relay board, and a main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a general term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second The starting port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the like correspond to each other.

The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which the main control MPU 1310a, which is the main control body, is mounted. The panel relay board 4161 is a board that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control board 1310.

The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. Further, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. It is electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[17-10. Arrangement position of panel relay board 4161 and main control board 1310 in the game machine]
FIG. 317 is a front view schematically showing each example of the arrangement position of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in the game machine 1. In FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D), the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are rear portions of the game board 5 which are not visible to the player, and are basically displayed on the game board side. It is located below the device (eg, liquid crystal display device) 1600. Reference numeral 300 is a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like and operated by the player, and reference numeral 410 is provided in the lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like. It is an operation button that is pushed and operated by the player for directing.

In FIG. 317 (A), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 4161 is located on the right side of the main control board 1310 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 317 (A) to 186 (D), specifically, on the rear surface of the box-shaped back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped transparent game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are attached.

In FIG. 317 (B), the panel relay board 4161 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located on the right side of the panel relay board 4161 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown. In FIG. 317 (C), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 4161 is located on the left side of the main control board 1310 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 4161 with respect to the main control board 1310 in the front-rear direction is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or the panel relay board in front of the main control board 1310. 4161 is located.

Further, FIG. 317 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 are overlapped and arranged in the front-rear direction in the center of the lower part of the rear portion of the game board 5. In FIG. 317 (D), the panel relay board 4161 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D) shown above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 is determined from various conditions.

The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. Further, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. It is electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the examples described below have been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is not only to provide an avoidance unit unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, but also to provide an avoidance unit. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the arrangement positional relationship between the vibration source and the control board.

[17-11. Arrangement example of avoidance unit]
FIGS. 318 (A) to 318 (C) are views showing an example of arrangement of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310. The avoidance unit 4510 shows a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance unit 4166 has been described above in FIGS. 307 to 309, and in the circuit portion arranged in front of the avoidance unit 4166, the connection state of the connector member is loosened, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added by the contact resistance, the action of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged after the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, there is an increased risk of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D) above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 is usually determined on the game board 5 from various conditions. At that time, consideration is often not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, the vibrating source that affects the vibration is caused by the collision between the game ball guideway member arranged in the right side area of the game area 5a by right-handed hitting and the game ball, for example, the effect button (operation button 410). ), The hitting motion of the ball launcher's hammer, the sound of a high-power speaker, and the like.

Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and a contact resistance is generated due to looseness of the connector member, and an avoidance unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

FIG. 318 (A) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 4161, and the connector is connected by applying vibration to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 4161. Even if the member 4501 loosens and a contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. Is.

FIG. 318 (B) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and vibration is generated in the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. When the connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened due to the addition, even if contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510, so that the connector member 4502 or 4503 is relayed from the panel relay board 4161. This is to avoid false detection of the output signal.

FIG. 318 (C) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on both the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310, respectively, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 4161. Vibration is applied to the member 4501 and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, whereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector is applied. Even if the member 4503 loosens and a contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. Moreover, the false detection of the signal relayed and output from the panel relay board 4161 is avoided.

[17-12. Specific example of vibration source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
FIGS. 319 (A) to 319 (F) are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration generation source in the game machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310. In each figure, a member that is a vibration source is shown by a hatched portion. FIGS. 319 (A) to 319 (C) show a game in which a large number of right-handed game balls continuously concentrate and flow down in the right area of the game area 5a when the game is played by right-handed. An example is shown in which a ball taxiway unit 4200 is provided, and when slight sliding wear occurs due to vibration from the game ball taxiway unit 4200 applied to the connector member, contact resistance may be generated due to this. There is.

In the case of the board-arranged game machine shown in FIG. 319 (A), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handed striking, the panel with respect to the game ball taxiway unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the relay boards 4161 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 318 (A)] of the panel relay board 4161 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

In the case of the game machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (B), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handed striking, the main force is relative to the game ball taxiway unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the control boards 1310 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 318 (B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318 (B)].

In the case of the game machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handed striking, the main is the game ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 are arranged close to each other, the connector members [connector member 4501, connector member 4502 and connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 318 (C)] of both boards vibrate. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (C)].

FIG. 319 (D) shows a case where the vibration source is the operation button 410. For example, when the player concentrates on the game and strikes the operation button 410 by force, or at the time of a specific effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a message of "continuous hit", and the player displays the message. By recognizing, when the player hits the operation button 410 continuously, or when the vibration source is an operation on the operation button 410 for production, the operation button 410 becomes the vibration source. Is assumed. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 319 (D), since the main control board 1310 is arranged close to the operation button 410 which is the vibration source, the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). The connector member 4503] shown in B) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318 (B)].

Not only in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (D), but also in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (B) to 317 (D), FIGS. 318 (A) to 318. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 319 (E) shows a case where the vibration source is a ball hammer 683 of the ball launcher 680 (see FIG. 91 for a specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the striking force (elastic force) of the ball launching device 680 with respect to the game ball launched by the hammer 683 becomes large, and the impact at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 319 (E), since the panel relay board 4161 is arranged close to the hitting mallet 683 which is the vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). The connector member 4501] shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

Not only in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (E), but also in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (B) to 317 (D), FIG. 318 (A) -The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 318 (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 319 (F) shows a case where the vibration source is a speaker 921 for sound output (see FIG. 91 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a loud sound effect is output from the speaker 921 in order to excite the game state at the time of a specific effect, and it is assumed that the vibration of the speaker 921 at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 319 (F), since the panel relay board 4161 is arranged close to the speaker 921 which is the vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. 318 (A). The connector member 4501] shown in) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318 (A)].

Not only in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (F), but also in the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (A), 317 (B) and 317 (D). , The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318 (A) to 318 (C) can be adopted.

The member serving as the vibration source shown above is not limited to one in the game machine 1. For example, a member provided with a game ball taxiway unit 4200 and a hitting mallet 683, a member provided with a game ball taxiway unit 4200 and an operation button 410, and the like, which are vibration sources depending on the game state. It is expected to change. That is, a game machine provided with a plurality of members serving as vibration sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318 (A) to 318 (C) can be adopted.

As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and the contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance is generated. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from 4000 and the panel relay board 4161.

As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down when a vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, such as when playing right-handed, contact resistance is generated by this. There is a risk.

When a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to such a situation, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor rises, and there is a risk that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the risk of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor increases. However, usually, the arrangement of the panel relay board and the main control board in the game board is determined from various conditions. At that time, consideration is often not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, the vibrating sources that affect it include the above-mentioned collision between the game board and the game ball by right-handed striking, for example, the striking operation of the effect button, the striking motion of the ball-launching mallet, and the high. The loud volume by the output speaker can be mentioned.

Therefore, the examples described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is not only to provide an avoidance unit unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, but also to provide an avoidance unit. The present invention relates to a game machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
A detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. And in order to solve the above problem,
In the area on the right side of the game area where the game ball is hit, a taxiway unit is arranged so that the game ball that is hit to the right continuously flows down when the game ball is hit to the right.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
The substrate having the connector member is arranged close to the game ball taxiway unit, and the contact resistance generated in the connector member on either one of the main control board and the panel relay board is used. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage addition action.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitable for either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball taxiway unit which is the vibration source. Can be placed in. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 2]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In the machine
It has an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation for production.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the operation button, and a voltage is added to either the main control board or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the action,
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button that is the vibration source. be able to. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In the machine
It has a ball launching device that launches a game ball into the game area in response to an operation on the hitting handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is arranged close to the hammer of the ball launcher, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member is generated on either one of the main control board and the panel relay board. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage addition action due to.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 3], the avoidance unit is placed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between the ball launcher, which is the source of vibration, and the hammer. Can be placed properly. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In the machine
Has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the speaker, and a voltage addition action due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to either the main control board or the panel relay board. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high output speaker when it becomes a vibration source. can do. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the game members that are the vibration generation sources. it can. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, in recent game machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for production. .. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories are increasing, and the operating range and, depending on the object, the operating speed are also increasing, and the moving method is also complicated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a vibration source, and the connector member becomes loose, which causes contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

By the way, if a plurality of movable accessories are not in the initial positions, there is a risk that a predetermined effect cannot be started normally.

Therefore, in order to surely grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, the origin position detection sensor (a photo sensor that is a set of a floodlight type and a light receiving type is often used) is directly built in the movable effect body or the drive motor. In the mold, these detection signals are fed back to the control body and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for production and the drive board is also realized by the connector members and the harness connecting them.

Since many concrete illustrations have already been made, the illustration is omitted, but the arrangement positions of the movable effectable objects on the game board surface are, for example, behind the upper part of the game area 5a (initial position) and behind the left side of the game area 5a. (Initial position), the production movable body divided into left and right in the central part of the game area 5a is united in the central part of the game panel, or the initial position in the lower center of the game area 5a (rear of the big winning opening unit, etc.) Depending on the model and version, such as when something moves upward, the placement position changes in various ways to appeal the characteristics of the game machine.

By the way, if it becomes impossible to correctly transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it and the origin detection signal, it is assumed that not only error detection may not be possible but also error transmission may occur. .. Here, it is considered that the avoidance unit 4166 described above is provided on the drive board in the subsequent stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on the control side on the signal input side.

As described above, even when the effect of rapidly coalescing at least two movable members is performed, it is expected that the vibration due to the collision at that time will be violently transmitted, and in this case as well, it is necessary to take appropriate measures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 320 (C), when performing an intense heat effect in which the left and right movable members shown by hatching are united at the central portion of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board and the left and right are arranged. It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the movable body. ..

[17-13. Electrical connection of origin position detection sensor, drive board and peripheral control board that controls it]
FIG. 320 (A) is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of mainly electrical connection of the peripheral control board 1510, the drive board 4161, the drive means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effect body. is there.

The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect, and is a board on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is the main body of the effect control, is mounted. The drive board 4161 is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

In FIG. 320, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the main body for the effect, and the drive board 4180 outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the initial position (origin) of the movable effect body. The information of the position detection sensor) is input and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this. The drive board 4161 is for supplying a drive current according to a drive signal to the drive means, and in addition, the drive board performs origin position detection for detecting an initial position in order to supply a drive current according to a movable effect body. Hand over to 4161. As shown in FIG. 320A, the transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by the connector members 4504, 4505, 4506.

Since the positional relationship of the movable member for producing the vibration source and the positional relationship of the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the drive board 4161 and the origin position inspection sensor are various, one of them is "connector connection by vibration". The avoidance unit 4150 is placed in consideration of the appropriate effect of loosening. It can be appropriately arranged as shown in FIG. 320 (A) or FIG. 320 (B). As a result, the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even when contact resistance is generated by these, the origin position detection sensor 4000 due to the contact resistance and the signal from the drive board are erroneously used. It is possible to avoid detection.

In addition, when operating the movable accessory, the looseness of the connector connection in the drive means, the origin position detection sensor unit, the drive board, and the peripheral control board, which are connected by the connector, was regarded as a problem, but of course, right-handed, operation button , Ball launcher, speaker is also applied when considered as a vibration source.

[17-14. Grouping of movable accessories for multiple productions]
As described above, in a game machine, a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for the effect are generally provided. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories are increasing, and the operating range and, depending on the object, the operating speed are also increasing, and the moving method is also complicated. further. The movable ranges of different movable accessories may intersect.

At present, when a problem occurs in one of a plurality of movable accessories, the operating state of the other movable accessories is hardly considered. If the return operation is performed only by the movable accessory in which the problem has occurred without considering the other movable accessory, there is a risk of interfering with the other movable accessory. In that case, there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and the interest of the game may be reduced.

Here, in order to use the movable accessory for the production, it is necessary to return all the movable accessory to the initial position. In addition, when the accessory is unintentionally stopped at a place other than the initial position for some reason, the movable accessory is restored to the initial position, but when a plurality of accessories are not in the initial position, the above-mentioned If you do not consider that the movable ranges of the movable accessories intersect each other as in, when performing the return operation, all the movable accessories will return to the initial position by physically interfering with other movable accessories. It may not be possible to make it. In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from the usual one may be generated due to the physical interference of the movable accessory. However, since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. On the substrate 1510, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor.

Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to reliably return the plurality of accessories to the initial position, the physically interfering accessories are collectively managed as one group, and the accessories in the group are managed together. By performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence, it is possible to reliably perform the return operation from a place other than the initial position.

In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessories is movable within the operating range from the initial position at which the operation is started to the operating position until the operation is completed. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable accessories is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operating ranges do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, a plurality of movable accessories in which the operating ranges interfere with each other. Contains things.

Further, the plurality of movable accessories are provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) that detects a preset initial position for each. The peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined operation when there is a problem that the initial position is not detected even in one of a plurality of movable accessories in a group including a plurality of movable accessories whose operating ranges interfere with each other. According to the sequence, all the movable accessories in the group are returned to their initial positions.

FIG. 321 is a front view conceptually showing a plurality of movable accessories for production provided in the game machine 1 and grouping of the plurality of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 321, the accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged in the central portion of the game machine 1, and the accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged in the right side portion of the game machine 1. The accessory group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is arranged on the left side of the machine 1, the accessory group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is arranged at the substantially center of the upper part of the game machine 1, and the accessory group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is arranged at the lower part of the game machine 1. The accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008) is arranged. That is, the game machine 1 has five accessory groups.

The five accessory groups 01 to 05 are designed so as not to physically interfere with each other within the operating range. More specifically, the accessory group 01 is composed of a masked accessory, a fuselage deformed left accessory, a fuselage deformed right accessory, a fuselage storage-appearing accessory, an upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and a lower liquid crystal driving accessory. There is. The character group 02 is composed of only the right shoulder character, the character group 03 is composed of only the left shoulder character, the character group 04 is composed of only the face character, and the character group 05 is composed of only the pop-up character. Has been done.

Therefore, the accessories that physically interfere with each other are in the same group. In the above example, the masked accessory belonging to the accessory group 01, the fuselage deformed left accessory, the fuselage deformed right accessory, the fuselage storage-appearing accessory, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and the lower liquid crystal driving accessory have operating ranges of each other. Are supposed to interfere with each other.

In this example, when the peripheral control board 1510 has a problem that the initial position is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the group according to a predetermined operation sequence. All movable accessories are returned to their initial positions.

More specifically, if even one of the movable accessories in the same group (accessory group 01) is determined to have a photo abnormality, all the accessories in the group are stopped. The photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The accessory correction operation in the group is a problem by operating all the movable accessories in the group by using not only the movable accessory in the problematic place but also the predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data. Restore the movable accessory to the correct initial position.

The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the drive order of the motors to be driven and their operation times (in other words, drive start timing and drive end timing), and is defined in the peripheral control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510. It is remembered in. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory group 01, since there are six movable accessories, the motors as the drive sources for driving these six movable accessories are the motor A (masked accessory) and the motor B (body deformation), respectively. Left accessory), motor C (body deformation right accessory), motor D (body storage-appearing accessory), motor E (upper liquid crystal drive accessory), motor F (lower liquid crystal drive accessory) To do.

When performing the restoration operation to the initial position, the motors to be driven may be driven one by one in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when physical interference between movable accessories cannot occur, the motors to be driven may be driven one by one. A plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start times may be staggered to drive together, or a plurality of drive may be driven at the same time.

For example, it is assumed that a photo abnormality is detected in the fuselage storage-appearing accessory (motor D). FIG. 322 is a timing chart in the case of performing the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 322, the restoration operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is driven first, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motor B and the motor C are driven at the same time. After that, the motor E and the motor F are driven at the same time at time t2. Further, after this, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven and stopped at time t3. After that, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously stopped at time t4. Further, the motor D is driven at the same time t4. Then, at time t5, the drive of the motor D is stopped. That is, the restoration operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that the drive stop of each motor is conditional on the photo detection being normal.

Since different groups do not physically interfere with each other, the return operation may be performed in parallel.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, in the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 has two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the circumferential direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL. Although the ones arranged in a row are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more may be arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, such as the third decorative surface portion and the fourth decorative surface portion.

In the above embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is shown to be rotatable only in an angle range of 180 degrees with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL, but it can be rotated within an angle range of up to 360 degrees. It may be possible to rotate it indefinitely.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first axis CL, which is the rotation axis of the decorative rotating body unit 530, is shown to extend horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the center axis CL of the operation button 410 is used. It may extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to each other.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through port 320 Dish unit 400B Third production operation unit 410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 415 Frame unit 420 Decorative board unit 520 Third base unit 521 Unit base 521g Left shaft part 521h Right bearing part 528 Production operation unit First drive motor (drive part)
530 Decorative rotating body unit 531 Rotating body base unit 531b Rotating body side left bearing part 531c Rotating body side right shaft part 532 First decorative surface part (decorative rotating body)
532d Shaft member 533 Second decorative surface (decorative rotating body)
533a Rotating decoration part 533b Fixed decoration part 534 Production operation unit Second drive motor 535 First decoration surface part decoration board 536 Second decoration surface part decoration board 830 Payout control board 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control board 3000 Back unit 3010 Back Box 3031 Production drive board 3032 Panel relay board 3130 Back front bottom decoration unit 3131 Back front bottom center lens 3500 Back top movable production unit 3513 First fixed decorative lens 3514 Back top first decoration board 3530 Back top second decoration unit 3533 (Ii) Fixed decorative lens 3534 Back top Second decoration board 3550 Back top third decoration unit 3535 Third fixed decoration lens 3554 Back top third decoration board 3570 Back top rotation base unit 3600 Back top rotation base unit 3610 Back top lifting unit 3610 Movable side unit 3611 Base CL1 1st axis CL2 2nd axis

Claims (3)

A game ball can collide with the right side area of the game area, and an abutting member is provided to allow the colliding game ball to flow downward in the rolling direction, and a magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism at a predetermined position is provided. With the game board
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
A relay board connected to the magnetic detection means by the first connector member so that a detection signal of the magnetic detection means is input .
With
The main control board is connected to the relay board by a second connector member , and the magnetic detection means and the main control board are electrically connected via the first connector member and the second connector member. In the game machine
The main control board
When the magnetic detection means is in the first state, the voltage is the first voltage, while when the magnetic detection means is in the second state, the voltage is the second voltage, which is a voltage lower than the first voltage. Output section and
A detection circuit unit that switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage from the voltage output unit.
The detection by the application of the magnetic detection means and the second connector member due to the contact resistance that occurs the second lower at constant-pressure than higher the first voltage than when the non-detection state game, wherein the avoiding portion including a resistor element without using a Zener diode to avoid acts to not switch the output of the detection signal of the circuit, but that is provided in a state of being electrically connected Machine.
The game ball can collide with the right side area of the game area, and an abutting member is provided to allow the colliding game ball to flow downward in the rolling direction, and the game ball being right-handed is placed at a predetermined position. A game board provided with a detectable game ball detecting means,
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
A relay board connected to the game ball detecting means by the first connector member so that a detection signal of the game ball detecting means is input .
With
The main control board is connected to the relay board by a second connector member , and the game ball detecting means and the main control board are electrically connected via the first connector member and the second connector member. In the game machine
The main control board
When the game ball detecting means is in the first state, it is set to the first voltage, while when the game ball detecting means is in the second state, it is set to a second voltage which is a voltage lower than the first voltage. Voltage output section and
A detection circuit unit that switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage from the voltage output unit.
Wherein the application of the gaming ball detection means said second connector member due to the contact resistance that occurs the second lower at constant-pressure than higher the first voltage than when the non-detection state avoidance unit comprising a resistive element without using a Zener diode to avoid acts to output will not be switched in the detection signal of the detection circuit, but characterized in that it is provided in a state of being electrically connected Game machine.
A game ball can collide with the right side area of the game area, and an abutting member is provided to allow the colliding game ball to flow downward in the rolling direction, and an abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality is provided at a predetermined position. With the game board
The main control board that controls the progress of the game,
A relay board connected to the abnormality detecting means by the first connector member so that the detection signal of the abnormality detecting means is input.
With
The main control board is connected to the relay board by a second connector member, and the abnormality detecting means and the main control board are electrically connected via the first connector member and the second connector member. In the game machine
The main control board
When the abnormality detecting means is in the first state, the voltage is set to the first voltage, while when the abnormality detecting means is in the second state, the voltage is set to the second voltage, which is a voltage lower than the first voltage. Output section and
A detection circuit unit that switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage from the voltage output unit.
By applying a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage due to the contact resistance generated in the second connector member when the abnormality detecting means is in the non-detection state, the detection circuit unit An avoidance part composed of a resistance element without using a Zener diode that avoids the action so that the output of the detection signal does not switch is provided in a state of being electrically connected.
A game machine characterized by that.